Home

Agilent 33220A 20 MHz Function / Arbitrary Waveform Generator

1. UES EVEN STAT QUES ENAB lt value STAT QUES ENAB Error Queue eee SYST ERR _ Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System NOTES C Condition Register EV Event Register EN Enable Register Ovid Overload Status Byte Register Standard Event Register Operation Complete Query Error Device Error Execution Error Command Error Power On is 1 gt 4 5 6 ESR ESE lt value ESE Serial Poll SRE lt value STB SRE Summary Bit RQS 251 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Status Byte Register The Status Byte summary register reports conditions from the other status registers Data that is waiting in the function generator s output buffer is immediately reported on the Message Available bit bit 4 Clearing an event register from one of the other register groups will clear the corresponding bits in the Status Byte condition register Reading all messages from the output buffer including any pending queries will clear the Message Available bit To set the enable register mask and generate an SRQ service request you must write a decimal value tothe register using the SRE command Bit Definitions Status Byte Register Decimal Bit Number Value Definition 0 Not Us
2. 325 Chapter 7 Tutorial Attributes of AC Signals Note f an averagereading voltmeter is used to measure the DC voltage of a waveform the reading may not agree with the DC Offset setting of the function generator This is because the waveform may have a non zero average value that would be added to the DC Offset You may occasionally see ac levels specified in decibels relative to 1 milliwatt dBm Since dBm represents a power level you will need to know the signal s RMS voltage and the load resistance in order to make the calculation dBm 10 x logio P 0 001 whereP Vprms RL For a sine wave into a 50Q load the following table relates dBm to voltage dBm RMS Voltage Peak to Peak Voltage 23 98 dBm 3 54 Vrms 10 00 Vpp 13 01 dBm 1 00 Vrms 2 828 Vpp 10 00 dBm 707 mVrms 2 000 Vpp 6 99 dBm 500 mVrms 1 414 Vpp 0 00 dBm 224 mVrms 632 mVpp 6 99 dBm 100 mVrms 283 mVpp 10 00 dBm 70 7 mVrms 200 mVpp 36 02 dBm 3 54 mVrms 10 0 mVpp For 75Q or 600Q loads use the following conversions dBm 75Q dBm 50Q 1 76 dBm 60092 dBm 50Q 10 79 326 Chapter 7 Tutorial Modulation Modulation Modulation is the process of modifying a high frequency signal called the carrie signal with low frequency information called the modulating signal The carrier and modulating signals can have any waveshape but the carrier is usually a sine waveform
3. Start of Even Number of Bytes to Follow Data Block 32 768 bytes 16 384 points Number of Digits to Follow The function generator represents binary data as 16 bit integers which are sent as two bytes Therefore the total number of bytes is always twice the number of data points in the waveform and must always be an even number For example 32 768 bytes are required to download a waveform with 16 384 points Use the FORM BORD command to select the byte order for binary transfers in block mode If you specify FORM BORD NORM default the most significant byte MSB of each data point is assumed first If you specify FORM BORD SWAP the least significant byte LSB of each data point is assumed first Most computers use the swapped byte order 231 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped FORMat BORDer Used for binary block transfers only Select the byte order for binary transfers in the block mode using the DATA DAC command The default is NORM The BORD query returns NORM or SWAP e In NORM byte order default the most significant byte M SB of each data point is assumed first e In SWAP byte order the least significant byte LSB of each data point is assumed first Most computers use the swapped byte order e The function generator represents binary data as signed 16 bit integers which are sent as two by
4. e If you select a ramp waveform as the modulating waveform for AM FM PM or PWM the symmetry setting does not apply e Front Pand Operation After selecting the ramp function press the Symmetry softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired symmetry e Remote nterface Operation FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum The APPLy command automatically sets the symmetry to 100 65 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Voltage Autoranging Autoranging is enabled by default and the function generator automatically selects the optimal settings for the output amplifier and attenuators With autoranging disabled the function generator uses the current amplifier and attenuator settings e You can disable autoranging to eliminate momentary disruptions caused by switching of the attenuators while changing amplitude However turning autoranging off has side effects e Theamplitude and offset accuracy and resolution as well as waveform fidelity may be adversely affected when reducing the amplitude below a range change that would occur with autoranging on e You may not be able to achieve the minimum amplitude that is available with autoranging on e Front Pane Operation Press viy and select the Output Setup softkey Then press the Range softkey again to toggle between the Auto and Hold selections e Remotelnterface Operation VOLTage RANGe AUTO O
5. DEF ault 149 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Output Configuration Commands see page 172 for more information FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC USER FUNCtion FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum VOLTage lt amplitude gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage MINimum MAXimum VOLTage OFFSet lt offset gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage OFFSet MINimum MAXimum VOLTage HIGH lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum HIGH MINimum MAXimum OW lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum OW MINimum MAXimum VOLTage RANGe AUTO OFF ON ONCE VOLTage RANGe AUTO VOLTage UNIT VPP VRMS DBM VOLTage UNIT FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry MINimum MAXimum Ce OUTPut OFF ON OUTPut OUTPut LOAD lt ohms gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum OUTPut LOAD MINimum MAXimum OUTPut POLarity NORMal INVerted OUTPut POLarity OUTPut SYNC OFF oN OUTPut SYNC Parameters shown in bold aresedected following a RST reset command 150 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Pulse Configuration Commands see page 185 for more information PULSe PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PULSe PERiod MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion PULSe HOLD
6. Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 48191 and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms e TheDATA DAC command overwrites the previous waveform in volatile memory and no error will be generated Use the DATA COPY command to copy the waveform to non volatile memory e Upto four user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile memory as well as the five built in waveforms e After downloading the waveform data to memory use the FUNC USER command to choose the active waveform and the FUNC USER command to output it 230 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands The following statement shows how to use the DATA DAC command to download seven integer points using the binary block format see also Using the EEE 488 2 Binary Block Format bdow DATA DAC VOLATILE 214 Binary Data The following statement shows how to use the DATA DAC command to download five integer points in decimal format DATA DAC VOLATILE 8191 4096 0 4096 8191 Using the IEEE 488 2 Binary Block Format In the binary block format a block header precedes the waveform data The block header has the following format 5 32768
7. e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry a e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry an e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform with 0 symmetry e If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 191 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Amplitude Modulation AM Commands AM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum AM INTernal FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected AM SOUR INT command Select from 2 mHz to 20 KHz The default is 100 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 20 kHz The FREQ query returns theinternal modulating frequency in hertz AM DEPTh lt depth in percent gt MINimum MAXimum AM DEPTh MINimum MAXimum Set the internal modulation depth or percent modulation in percent Select from 0 to 120 The default is 100 MIN 0 MAX 120 The DEPT query returns the modulation depth in percent e Note that even at greater than 100 depth the function generator will not exceed 5V peak on the output into a 500 load e Ifyou select the External modulating source AM SOUR EXT command the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform
8. infinite burst count 2 Select the triggered or gated burst mode Select the triggered burst mode called N Cycle on the front panel or external gated burst mode using the BURS MODE command 3 Set the burst count Set the burst count the number of cycles per burst to any value between 1 and 50 000 cycles or infinite using the BURS NCYC command Used in the triggered burst mode only 4 Set the burst period Set the burst period the interval at which internally triggered bursts are generated to any value from 1 us to 500 seconds using the BURS INT PER command Used only in thetriggered burst mode with an internal trigger source 5 Set the burst starting phase Set the starting phase of the burst to any value from 360 degrees to 360 degrees using the BURS PHAS command 6 Select the trigger source Select the trigger source using the TRIG SOUR command Used in the triggered burst mode only 7 Enable the burst mode After you have set up the other burst parameters use the BURS STAT ON command to enable the burst mode 217 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands Burst Mode Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the waveform For internally triggered bursts the minimum frequency is 2 001 mHz For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst c
9. Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum offset and amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum offset is limited to 4 95 volts into 50 ohms You can also set the offset by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an offset voltage of 500 mV For dc volts the output level is actually controlled by setting the offset voltage You can set the dc level to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into an open circuit To select dc volts from the front panel press witty and then select the DC On softkey Press the Offset softkey to set the desired offset voltage level Front Pand Operation To set the dc offset press the Offset softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired offset To set the offset using a high level and low level press the Offset softkey again to toggle to the HiLevel and LoLevel softkeys Remote Interface Operation VOLTage OFFSet lt offse gt MINimum MAXimum Or you can set the offset by specifying a high level and low level using the following commands VOLTage HIGH lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum
10. Test Cal menu e Remotelnterface Operation To unsecure the function generator send the following command with the correct security code CAL SECURE STATE OFF AT33220A To Secure Against Calibration You can secure the function generator either from the front panel or over the remote interface The function generator is secured when shipped from the factory and the security code is set to AT 33220A e Once you enter a security code that code must be used for both front panel and remote operation For example if you secure the function generator from the front panel you must use that same code to unsecure it from the remote interface e Front Pand Operation Press vuy and then select the Secure On softkey from the Test Cal menu e Remotelnterface Operation To secure the function generator send the following command with the correct security code CAL SECURE STATE ON AT33220A 142 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Calibration Overview To Change the Security Code To change the security code you must first unsecure the function generator and then enter a new code Make sure you have read the security code rules described on page 141 before attempting to change the security code e Front Paned Operation To change the security code unsecure the function generator using the old security code Then press uuy select the Secure Code softkey from the Test Cal menu Changing the code from
11. The modulation depth is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 using the AM DEPT command then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude AM STATe OFF ON AM STATe Disable or enable AM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable AM and FM at the same time When you enable AM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow AM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable AM the sweep or burst mode is turned off 192 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Modulation FM Commands Frequency Modulation FM Commands See also Frequency Modulation starting on page 79 in chapter 3 FM Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an FM waveform The commands used for FM are listed on the next page Configure the carrier waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to s
12. This featureis available from the front pand only TF 1 900 000 00 kHz i 100000000 kHz My ES i ane Offset Freg Ai Anp Erret Period HiLevel LoLevel Period HiLevel LoLevel Decimal Point Period Decimal Point Comma Digits Separator Comma Digits Separator None e The number format is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset When shipped from the factory a period is used for the decimal point and commas are used for the digits separator e g 1 000 000 00 kHz and then select the Number Format e Front Pand Operation Press Uitlicy softkey from the System menu 133 Firmware Revision Query You can query the function generator to determine which revision of firmware is currently installed The revision code contains five numbers in the form f ff b bb aa p f ff Firmwarerevision number b bb Boot kernel revision number aa ASIC revision number p Printed circuit board revision number e Front Pand Operation Press vii and then select the Cal Info softkey from the Test Cal menu The revision code is listed as one of the messages on the front panel display e Remotelnterface Operation Use the following command to read the function generator s firmware revision numbers be sure to dimension a string variable with at least 50 characters IDN This command returns a string in the form Agilent Technologi
13. User s Guide Publication Number 33220 90002 order as 38220 90100 manual set Edition 3 March 2005 Copyright Agilent Technologies Inc 2003 2005 For Safety information Warranties and Regulatory information see the pages following the Index Agilent 33220A 20 MHz Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Agilent 33220A at a Glance The Agilent Technologies 33220A is a 20 MHz synthesized function generator with built in arbitrary waveform and pulse capabilities Its combination of bench top and system features makes this function generator a versatile solution for your testing requirements now and in the future Convenient bench top features 10 standard waveforms Built in 14 bit 50 M Sa s arbitrary waveform capability Precise pulse waveform capabilities with adjustable edge time LCD display provides numeric and graphical views Easy to use knob and numeric keypad Instrument state storage with user defined names Portable ruggedized case with non skid feet Flexible system features Four downloadable 64K point arbitrary waveform memories GPIB IEEE 488 USB and LAN remote interfaces are standard SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments compatibility Note Unless otherwiseindicated this manual applies toall Serial Numbers The Front Panel at a Glance Output OFF w 1 Graph Mode Local Key 9 Manual Trigger Key used for 2 On Off Switch Sweep and Burst only 3 Modulat
14. e Function Limitations If you change toa function whose minimum period is greater than that for a pulse waveform the period is adjusted to the minimum value allowed for the new function F or example if you output a pulse waveform with a period of 200 ns and then change tothe ramp function the function generator will automatically adjust the period to 5 us the lower limit for ramps From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the period will be adjusted as described FUNCtion PULSe HOLD WIDTh DCyCle FUNCtion PULSe HOLD WIDTh DCyCle Set the function generator to hold either pulse width or pulse duty cyde e WIDTh The function generator holds the pulse width setting in seconds constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply If a command to set a duty cycle value is received the duty cycleis converted to the equivalent pulse width in seconds If Pulse Width Modulation PWM is turned on the pulse width is held and the width deviation also is held as the period is varied Duty cycle deviation commands are converted to width deviation values e DCYCle The function generator holds the pulse duty cycle setting in percent constant as the period is varied Minimum width and edge time restrictions apply If a command to set a pulse width value is received the width is converted to the equivalent duty cyclein percent If Pulse Width Modulation PWM is turne
15. s 50 MHz sampling frequency will appear as spurs at 20 MHz and 5 MHz Another source of non harmonic spurs is the coupling of unrelated signal sources Such as the microprocessor clock into the output signal These spurs usually have a constant amplitude lt 75 dBm or 112 pV pp regardless of the signal s amplitude and are most troublesome at signal amplitudes below 100 mVpp To obtain low amplitudes with minimum spurious content keep the function generator s output level relatively high and use an external attenuator if possible Phase Noise Phase noise results from small instantaneous changes in the output frequency jitter It is seen as an elevation of the apparent noise floor near the fundamental frequency and increases at 6 dBc octave with the carrier frequency The 33220A s phase noise specification represents the amplitude of the noise in a 1 Hz bandwidth 10 kHz away from a 20 M Hz carrier Quantization Errors Finite DAC resolution 14 bits leads to voltage quantization errors Assuming the errors are uniformly distributed over a range of 0 5 least significant bit LSB the equivalent noise level is 86 dBc for a sine wave that uses the full DAC range 16 384 levels Similarly finite length waveform memory leads to phase quantization errors Treating these errors as low level phase modulation and assuming a uniform distribution over a range of 0 5 LSB the equivalent noise level is 76 dBc for a sine wave that
16. 10 MHz Settings conflict marker forced into sweep span The marker must be within the sweep span between the start and stop frequency The marker frequency is forced into that range 285 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict selected arb is missing changing selection to default If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non volatile memory after storing the instrument state the waveform data is lost and the function generator will not output the waveform when the state is recalled The built in exponential rise waveform is output in place of the deleted waveform Settings conflict offset changed due to amplitude The relationship between offset voltage and output amplitude is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load If the existing offset voltage is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum dc voltage allowed with the amplitude specified Voffset lt Vmax pe Settings conflict amplitude changed due to offset The relationship between output amplitude and offset voltage is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load If the existing amplitude is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it
17. 20 MHz the maximum frequency for sine with a 2 5 volt offset APPL SIN MAX 3 0 2 5 The APPLy command performs the following operations e Sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to sending the TRIG SOUR IMM command e Turns off any modulation sweep or burst mode currently enabled and places the instrument in the continuous waveform mode e Turns on the Output connector OUTP ON command but does not change the output termination setting OUTP LOAD command e Overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging VOLT RANG AUTO command e For square waveforms overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 FUNC SQU DCYC command e For ramp waveforms overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 FUNC RAMP SYMM command 168 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command APPLy SINusoid lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offs amp gt Output a sine wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPLy SQUare lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offsd gt Output a square wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset This command overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPLy RAMP lt frequency gt lt
18. 221 224 immediate internal 221 224 software bus 213 source 213 sweep 104 trigger out signal burst 114 trigger out signal sweep 105 TRIGger command 225 trigger output signal 214 223 226 trigger slope 214 222 225 burst 113 sweep 104 trigger input 214 trigger output 214 213 350 Index triggering burst 114 external source 117 front panel operation 46 internal source 116 manual source 116 software bus source 117 sweep 105 Trig In connector 118 Trig Out connector 119 trigger sources 115 213 221 224 tutorial 311 TXCO timebase 248 U UNIT ANGLe command 249 units amplitude 62 as part of command 184 burst phase 221 converting voltage 19 voltage 165 USB configuration 48 135 connector 6 v version SCPI 134 245 VOLTage HIGH command 178 HIGH command 178 LOW command 178 LOW command 178 OFF Set command 177 OFF Set command 177 RANGe AUTO command 179 AUTO command 179 UNIT command 184 voltage autorange 66 179 322 VOLTage command 175 voltage overload 66 voltage units 62 165 184 converting 19 VOLTage command 175 vpp 62 184 vrms 62 184 WwW waveform imperfections 320 waveform invert 67 waveform output connector 66 enable disable 66 181 polarity 67 waveform polarity 67 waveform tutorial 311 waveforms point interpolation 122 wideband FM 329 width pulse definition 187 Z zero phase reference 249 351 352 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Acco
19. Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Data out of range pulse edge time value clipped to This generic message indicates that the desired edge time is limited to an upper or lower boundary which is dictated by the instrument hardware Data out of range FM deviation value clipped to This generic message indicates that the desired FM deviation is limited to a lower or upper boundary as set by the current function s frequency Data out of range FM deviation limited by minimum frequency The frequency deviation is limited to the lower limit 1 Hz Data out of range FM deviation limited by maximum frequency value clipped to upper limit The frequency deviation cannot exceed the carrier frequency and is limited as follows 10 05 MHz for sine or square wave carriers 150 kHz for a ramp or 3 05 MHz for an arbitrary waveform Data out of range PWM deviation The PWM deviation is limited Width deviation can be from 0 to the width of the underlying pulse waveform Duty cycle deviation can be from 0 to the duty cycle of the underlying pulse waveform Both are further limited by the minimum pulse width and edge time parameters Data out of range PWM deviation limited by pulse parameters The PWM deviation is limited by the current pulse parameters The PWM deviation width or duty cycle is set to accommodate the current pulse width or duty cycle edge time and period 291 222 222 224 Ch
20. GATE POLarity OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig Out Connector TRIGger SLOPe TRIGger OFF ON TRIGger Parameters shown in bold are sd eted following a RST reset command 155 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Arbitrary Waveform Commands see page 227 for moreinformation DATA VOLATILE lt value lt value gt DATA DAC VOLATILE lt binaryblock gt lt value gt lt value FORMat BORDer NORMal SWAPped Specify Byte Order FORMat BORDer DATA COPY lt destination arbname gt VOLATILE FUNCtion USER lt arb name gt VOLATILE FUNCt ion USER FUNCtion USER FUNCtion DATA CATalog NVOLatile CATalog NVOLatile FREE DATA DELete lt arb name gt DATA DELete ALL DATA ATTRibute AVERage lt arb name gt ATTRibute CFACtor lt arb name gt ATTRibute POINts lt arbname gt ATTRibute PTPeak lt arbname gt 1Thenames of the built in arb waveforms are EXP_RISE EXP_FALL NEG_ RAMP SINC and CARDIAC Parameters shown in bold aresedected following a RST reset command 156 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Triggering Commands see page 224 for more information These commands are used for Sweep and Burst only TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS TRIGger SOURcCe TRIGger TRG TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig In Connector
21. Returns a string in the form YYYY V where YYYY represents the year of the version and V represents a version number for that year e g 1999 0 SYSTem BEEPer Issue a single beep immediately SYSTem BEEPer STATe OFF ON SYSTem BEEPer STATe Disable or enable the tone heard when an error is generated from the front panel or over the remote interface The current selection is stored in non volatile memory The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON SYSTem KLOCk STATe OFF ON Set front panel keyboard lock OFF the default or ON With KLOC ON the front panel keyboard is locked including the ea key unless it has been excluded To lock the keyboard without locking the key send SYST KLOC EXCL LOC first before SYST KLOC ON SYSTem KLOCk EXCLude NONE LOCal SYSTem KLOCk EXCLude e Setting EXCL NONE the default sets no exclusion and SYST KLOC ON locks the entire keyboard including the L e Setting EXCL LOC excludes the t key and SYST KLOC ON locks the keyboard except the t key 245 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Commands SYSTem SECurity IMMediate Clears all instrument memory except for the boot parameters and calibration constants Initializes all instrument settings to their RST values Destroys all user defined state information user defined arbitrary waveforms and user defined I O settings such as the IP address This comma
22. STATe Disable or enable the sweep mode To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable the sweep mode after you have set up the other sweep parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled at the same time that burst or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable sweep the burst or modulation mode is turned off 212 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS TRIGger SOURce Select the source from which the function generator will accept a trigger The function generator will accept an immediate internal trigger a hardware trigger from the rear panel Trig In connector or a software bus trigger The default is IMM The SOUR query returns IMM EXT or BUS When the Immediate internal source is selected the function generator outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time specified SWE TIME command plus 1 ms When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied tothe rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by the TRIG SLOP command see page 214 Note that the trigger period must be greater than or equal to the specified sweep time plus 1 ms When the
23. Settings conflict edge time decreased due to period For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the edge time to accommodate the specified period and preserve the pulse width setting Settings conflict pulse width increased due to large period For a pulse waveform the minimum pulse width is 20 ns for periods up to 10 seconds For periods above 10 seconds the minimum pulse width is greater The function generator has adjusted the pulse width to the new minimum determined by the current period See Pulse Configuration Commands in chapter 4 for further information 283 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict edge time decreased due to pulse width For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the edge time to accommodate the specified pulse width Edge Time lt 0 625 X Pulse Width Settings conflict edge time decreased due to pulse duty cycle For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adju
24. The function generator has five storage locations in non volatile memory to store instrument states The locations are numbered 0 through 4 The function generator automatically uses location 0 to hold the state of the instrument at power down You can also assign a user defined name to each of the locations 1 through 4 for use from the front panel e You can store the instrument state in any of the five storage locations However you can only recall a state from a location that contains a previously stored state e From the remote interface only you can use storage location 0 to store a fifth instrument state you cannot store to this location from the front panel However note that location 0 is automatically overwritten when power is cycled the instrument state previously stored will be overwritten e The state storage feature remembers the selected function including arbitrary waveforms frequency amplitude dc offset duty cycle symmetry as well as any modulation parameters in use e When shipped from the factory storage locations 1 through 4 are empty location 0 contains the power down state e When power is turned off the function generator automatically stores its state in storage location 0 You can configure the function generator to automatically recall the power down state when power is restored However when shipped from the factory the function generator is confi
25. The two most common types of modulation are amplitude modulation AM and frequency modulation FM These two forms of modulation modify the carrier s amplitude or frequency respectively according to the instantaneous value of the modulating signal A third type of modulation is phase modulation PM which is similar to FM except that the phase of the carrier waveform is varied rather than its frequency Another type of modulation is frequency shift keying F SK where the output frequency shifts between two frequencies depending on the state of a digital modulating signal Finally pulse width modulation PWM is provided for pulse waveforms only In PWM the pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse waveform is varied according to the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source If you select the internal source the modulated waveform is generated by a secondary DDS synthesizer If you select the external source the modulated waveform is controlled by the signal level present on the function generator s rear panel Modulation In connector The external signal is sampled and digitized by an analog to digital converter ADC With either modulation source the result is a stream of digital samples representing the modulating waveform Notethat for FSK the output frequency is determined by the signal level present on the rear panel Trig In connector 327 Chapter 7 Tut
26. The width deviation represents the variation in width in seconds in the modulated waveform from the width of the original pulse waveform e Width deviation O s to 1000 s see below The default is 10 us e The width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width e The width deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wmin Width Deviation lt Pulse Width Wmin and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse Width Wmin where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10 s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10s but lt 100 s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s e The width deviation is limited by the current edge time setting Width Deviation lt Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time e Front Pand Operation After enabling PWM press the Width Dev softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation e Remotelnterface Operation PWM DEViation lt deviation in seconds gt MINimum MAXimum Note The pulsewidth and width deviation and the pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are coupled in the front pane interface If you select Width for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Width Dev softkey is available On theother hand if you sd ect Dty Cyc for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Dty Cyc Dev softkey is available 96 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Duty Cycl
27. Trig Out 119 214 223 226 context sensitive help 27 contrast display 131 count burst 110 219 crest factor 325 crest factor arb waveforms 237 custom name arbitrary waveforms 124 stored states 127 240 cycle count burst 110 219 D DATA ATTRibute CF ACtor 237 CATalog command 235 COPY command 232 DAC VOLATILE command 230 DELete ALL command 236 DELete command 236 NVOLatile CATalog command 235 FREE command 235 DATA VOLATILE command 229 dBc 320 dBm 62 184 326 dc offset command amplitude limitations 60 167 177 arb waveform 61 177 arbitrary waveform limitations 167 front panel selection 20 load limitations 60 167 177 dc voltage 176 front panel selection 20 DC volts setting 22 DDS 313 decimal point 133 default settings 145 degrees 220 delete arb waveforms 236 delete stored states 240 depth AM 192 328 devation FM 195 devation PM 199 deviation FM 83 329 device clear 271 DHCP 49 DHCP On Off 136 digits separator 133 dimensions product 340 direct digital synthesis 313 DISPlay TEXT CLEar command 244 TEXT command 244 display 243 brightness 131 bulb saver mode 130 contrast 131 displaying message 132 244 enable disable 132 243 limitations number format 133 overview 4 DISPlay command 243 display graph mode 25 DNS server 139 domain name 139 dot notation and IP addresses 52 duty cycle 64 definition 64 180 frequency limitations 57 64 174 180 front panel selection 23 modu
28. VOLTage LOW lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 61 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Output Units Applies to output amplitude only At power on the units for output amplitude are volts peak to peak Output units Vpp Vrms or dBm The default is Vpp The unit setting is stored in volatile memory The units are set to V pp when power has been off or after a remote interface reset provided the Power On state is set to default The function generator uses the current units selection for both front panel and remote interface operations For example if you select VRM S from the remote interface the units are displayed as VRMS on the front panel The output units for amplitude cannot be set to dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp Front Pand Operation Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired magnitude and then press the appropriate softkey to select the units You can also convert from one unit to another from the front panel For example to convert 2 Vpp to its equivalent value in Vrms press and then press the Vans softkey The converted value is 707 1 mVrms for a sine wave Remote Interface Operation VOLTage UNIT VPP VRMS DBM 62 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Outp
29. What is an Event Register An event register latches the various events from changes in the condition register There is no buffering in this register while an event bit is set subsequent events corresponding to that bit are ignored This is a read only register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by query command such as STAT QUES EVEN or a CLS clear status command A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in that register What is an Enable Register An enable register defines which bits in the event register will be reported to the Status Byte register group You can write to or read from an enable register A CLS clear status command will not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register A STAT PRES command clears all bits in the enable register To enable bits in the enable register to be reported to the Status Byte register you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the corresponding bits 250 Agilent 33220A Status System Questionable Data Register Cc Volt Ovid EV EN 0 PEERS Loop Unlock 5 3 4 6 Cal Error s External Ref EEIE N W lelKlElele z 15 STAT QUES COND STAT Q Output Buffer N eee mY als
30. WriteString AM DEPTh 80 Modulation depth 80 WriteString AM STATe ON Turn AM modulation on WriteString OUTPut ON Turn on the instrument output WriteString SAV 1 Store state in memory location 1 Use the RCL 1 command to recall the stored state End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 305 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example Linear Sweep This program found in the E xamples chapter6 LinearSweep subdirectory on the CD ROM creates a linear sweep for a sine wave It sets the start and stop frequencies and the sweep time Private Sub cmdLinearSweep_Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib Formatted1I0488 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib Formatted1I0488 Set Fgen IO io_mgr Open txtIO Text On Error GoTo MyError This program sets up a linear sweep using a sinusoid waveform It sets the start and stop frequency and sweep time With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors and status registers WriteString FUNCtion SINusoid Select waveshape WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 Set the load impedance to 50 Ohms default WriteString VOLTage 1 Set the amplitude to 1 Vpp WriteString SWEep SPACing LiNear Set Linear or LOG spacing WriteString SWEep TIME 1 Sweep time is 1 second WriteStri
31. as well as the five built in waveforms e After downloading the waveform data to memory use the FUNC USER command to choose the active waveform and the FUNC USER command to output it e The following statement shows how to use the DATA command to download seven points to volatile memory DATA VOLATILE 1 67 33 0 33 67 1 229 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA DAC VOLATILE lt binaryblock gt lt value lt value Download binary or decimal integer values from 8191 to 8191 into volatile memory You can download from 1 to 65 536 64K points per waveform in EEE 488 2 binary block format or as a list of values The range of values corresponds to the values available using internal 14 bit DAC Digital to Analog Converter codes The function generator takes the specified number of points and expands them to fill waveform memory If you download less than 16 384 16K points a waveform with 16 384 points is automatically generated If you download more than 16 384 points a 65 536 point waveform is generated e The values 8191 and 8191 correspond to the peak values of the waveform if the offset is 0 volts For example if you set the output amplitude to 10 Vpp 8191 corresponds to 5V and 8191 corresponds to 5V e The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC For example the built in
32. if a valid state is stored in the specified location MEMory NSTates Query the total number of memory locations available for state storage Always returns 5 memory location O is included 241 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Commands System Related Commands Seealso Systen Redlated Operations starting on page 126 in chapter 3 SYSTem ERRor Read and clear one error from the function generator s error queue A record of up to 20 command syntax or hardware errors can be stored in the error queue Seechapter 5 for a completelisting of theerror messages e Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them The function generator beeps once each time an error is generated unless disabled using the SYST BEEP STAT command e If morethan 20 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with Queue overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the function generator responds with No error e The error queue is cleared by the cLs clear status command or when the power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the queue The error queue is not cleared by a reset RST command e Errors have the following format
33. points or less can be created or edited from thefront pand Refer to chapter 7 Tutorial for more information on the internal operation of downloading and outputting an arbitrary waveform To Create and Store an Arbitrary Waveform This section gives an example which shows you how to create and store an arbitrary waveform from the front panel To download an arbitrary waveform from the remote interface see Arbitrary Waveform Commands starting on page 227 For this example you will create and store the ramp waveform shown below using four waveform points Volt Div 1 Volt Time Div 1 ms Ea ee ae 120 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms 1 Select the arbitrary waveform function When you press J to select the arbitrary function a temporary message is displayed indicating which waveform is currently selected 2 Start the arbitrary waveform editor Press the Create New softkey to start the waveform editor While in the waveform editor you define the waveform by specifying time and voltage values for each point in the waveform When creating a new waveform the previous waveform in volatile memory is overwritten 3 Set the waveform period Press the Cycle Period softkey to set the time boundaries for the waveform The time value of the last point that can be defined in the waveform must be less than the specified cycle period For this example set the period of the
34. the same amplitude is used if the present value is valid for the new function To set the amplitude using a high levd and low leva press the Ampl softkey again to toggle to the HiLevel and LoLevel softkeys the current selection is highlighted 0 0m FU Period HiLevel LoLevel Enter the magnitude of the desired amplitude Using the numeric keypad enter the value 50 select the units by p a key below dBm CANCEL Select the desired units Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units When you select the units the function generator outputs the waveform with the displayed amplitude if the output is enabled For this example press mMVpys eq Ag Amp Period HiLevel LoLevel Note You can also enter thedesired value using the knob and cursor keys 18 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the Output Amplitude You can easily convert the displayed amplitude from one unit to another For example the following steps show you how to convert the amplitude from Vrms to Vpp Enter the numeric entry mode Press the key to enter the numeric entry mode Select the units b a key b dBm CANCEL Select the new units Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units The displayed value is converted to the new units For this example press the Vpp softkey to convert 50 mVrms to its equivalent in volts peak to peak TH1 4mVpp OU Period HiLevel LoLevel To change the dis
35. 183 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands VOLTage UNIT VPP VRMS DBM VOLTage UNIT Select the units for output amplitude does not affect offset voltage or high low levels The default is VPP The UNIT query returns VPP VRMS or DBM e The function generator uses the current units selection for both front panel and remote interface operations For example if you select VRMS from the remote interface using the VOLT UNIT command the units are displayed as VRM S on the front panel e The VvoLT query command see page 175 returns the output amplitude in the units set by the most recent VOLT UNIT command e The output units for amplitude cannot be set to dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp Seethe OUTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information e Unless you specify the units as part of the APPLy or VOLT command the VOLT UNIT command takes precedence For example if you select Vrms using the VOLT UNIT command and do not include units with the APPLy or VOLT command the value specified for the amplitude parameter in the APPLy command will bein Vrms 184 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands Pulse Configuration Commands Se also Pulse Waveforms starting on page 70 in chapter 3 This section describes the low level
36. 1998 Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB 001 1998 du Canada Safety IEC 61010 1 2001 EN 61010 1 2001 Canada CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 1992 UL 3111 1 1994 21 February 2003 Date Ray Corson Product Regulations Program Manager For further information please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office agent or distributor Copyright Agilent Technologies Inc 20038 2005 No part of this manual may be repro duced in any form or by any means including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies as governed by the United States and international copyright laws Manual Part Number 33220 90002 March 2005 order as 33220 90100 manual set Edition Edition 3 March 2005 Printed in Malaysia Agilent Technologies Inc 815 14th Street S W Loveland Colorado 80537 U S A Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Agilent Technologies products For assistance contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office Further information is available on the Agilent web site at www agilent com find assist Trademark Information Microsoft and Windows are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies Certificati
37. 3 94 gt CALibration SETup Configure the function generator s internal state for each of the calibration steps to be performed The SET query reads the calibration setup number and returns a value from 0 to 94 CALibration VALue lt value gt CALibration VALue Specify the value of the known calibration signal as outlined in the calibration procedures in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide Usethe CAL SET command to configure the function generator s internal state for each of the calibration steps to be performed The VAL query returns a number in the form 1 0000000000000E 01 CALibration Perform a calibration of the instrument using the specified calibration value CAL VAL command Before you can calibrate the function generator you must unsecure it by entering the correct security code Returns 0 PASS or 1 FAIL 264 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Calibration Commands CALibration SECure CODE lt new code gt Enter a new security code To change the security code you must first unsecure the function generator using the old security code and then enter a new code The security code is stored in non volatile memory e Thecalibration code may contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ You do not have to use all 12 characters but the firs
38. 33220A The specified value is used for amplitude offset and high low level settings You can set the load to any value from 129 to 10 kQ MIN selects 10 MAX selects 10 kQ INF sets the output termination to high impedance gt 10 kQ The default is 50Q The LOAD query returns the current load setting in ohms or 9 9E 37 for high impedance e The Agilent 33220A has a fixed series output impedance of 50 ohms to the front panel Output connector If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude offset and high low levels will be incorrect e If you change the output termination setting the displayed output amplitude offset and high low levels are automatically adjusted and no error will be generated For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will doubleto 20 Vpp If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half e You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp Seethe VOLT UNIT command on page 184 for more information 182 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands OUTPut POLarity NORMal INVerted OUTPut POLarity Invert the wavef
39. 35 244 instrument self test 131 245 instrument specifications 335 instrument state recall power down state 241 instrument state storage 126 238 naming 127 power down recall 126 instrument states naming from front panel 47 storing from front panel 47 instrument stored states default names 240 deleting from memory 240 integer download arbs 230 interface bus trigger 117 interface configuration 48 135 interface errors 129 242 345 Index internal trigger 116 213 221 224 interpolation 122 invert waveform 67 IP address 50 137 dot notation 52 further information 52 J jitter 321 L LAN connector 6 current configuration 140 DHCP 136 DNS server 139 domain name 139 front panel configuration 49 further information 140 gateway 138 host name 138 IP address 137 setting address 49 subnet mask 137 LAN configuration 48 135 language SCPI overview 266 language help system 28 LCD display 4 bulb saver mode 130 leakage errors 317 learn string 245 linear interpolation 122 linear sweep 212 load 35 63 load impedance 323 load termination 35 local language help 28 local operation LAN 247 logarithmic sweep 212 low level 178 setting 21 M manual trigger 116 MARKer FRE Quency command 215 marker frequency 103 215 marker signal 333 MAV 255 MEMory NSTates command 241 STATe DELete command 240 NAME command 240 RECall AUTO command 241 VALid command 241 menu quick reference 33 menu
40. Arbitrary Waveform Commands on page 227 for more information Nonvolatile arb waveform memory corruption detected The non volatile memory used to store arbitrary waveforms has detected a checksum error The arbitrary waveform cannot be retrieved from memory Not enough memory to store new arb waveform use DATA DELETE The four non volatile memory locations already contain arbitrary waveforms To store another waveform you must first delete one of the stored waveforms using the DATA DELete command Not enough memory to store new arb waveform bad sectors Due toa hardware error there are no more memory locations available to store arbitrary waveforms This error is likely the result of a failed Flash memory device Cannot overwrite a built in waveform The following built in waveform names are reserved and cannot be used with the DATA COPY command EXP_RISE EXP_FALL NEG RAMP SINC and CARDIAC Name of source arb waveform for copy must be VOLATILE When using the DATA COPY command you cannot copy from any source other than VOLATILE Specified arb waveform does not exist The DATA COPY command copies the waveform from volatile memory to the specified name in non volatile memory Before executing the DATA COPY command you must download the waveform using the DATA VOLATILE Or DATA DAC VOLATILE command 299 786 787 788 800 810 Chapter 5 Error Messages Arbitrary Wav
41. As VisaComL ib F ormattedl 0488 3 Use Set F gen New VisaComLib F ormatted l 0488 to create the actual object 303 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Program Listings Example A Simple Sine Waveform This program found in the E xamples chapter6 SimpleSine subdirectory on the CD ROM selects the function as sine and then sets the frequency amplitude and offset of the waveform Private Sub cmdSimpleSine Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib Formatted1I0488 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib Formatted1I0488 Set Fgen IO io _mgr Open txtIO Text On Error GoTo MyError This program sets up a waveform by selecting the waveshape and adjusting the frequency amplitude and offset With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors and status registers WriteString FUNCtion SINusoid Select waveshape Other options are SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC and USER WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 Set the load impedance in Ohms 50 Ohms default May also be INFinity as when using oscilloscope or DMM WriteString FREQuency 2500 Set the frequency WriteString VOLTage 1 2 Set the amplitude in Vpp Also see VOLTage UNIT WriteString VOLTage OFFSet 0 4 Set the offset in Volts Voltage may also be set as VOLTage HIGH and VOLTage LOW for low level and high level Writ
42. Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in SINC waveform does not use the full range of binary values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms e If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 234 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA CATalog List the names of all waveforms currently available for selection Returns the names of the five built in waveforms non volatile memory VOLATILE if a waveform is currently downloaded to volatile memory and all user defined waveforms downloaded to non volatile memory e A series of quoted strings separated with commas is returned as shown in the example below VOLATILE EXP RISE EXP FALL NEG RAMP SINC CARDIAC TEST1 ARB TEST2 ARB e Usethe DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the user defined waveforms in non volatile memory DATA NVOLatile CATalog List the names of all user defined arbitrary waveforms downloaded to non volatile memory Returns the names of up to four waveforms e A series of quoted strings separated with commas is returned as shown in the example below If no user defined waveforms are currently downloaded the command returns a null string TEST1 ARB TEST2 ARB TEST3 ARB TES
43. FM enabled the function generator will automatically adjust the deviation tothe maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency Settings conflict FM deviation exceeds max frequency The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz 20 1 MHz for sine and square 300 kHz for ramp and 5 1 MHz for arbitrary waveforms If you set the carrier to a value that is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency Settings conflict PWM deviation decreased due to pulse parameters The PWM deviation is limited by the pulse width or duty cycle edge time and period The PWM deviation width or duty cycle deviation is adjusted to fit within these limits See Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands in chapter 4 for further information Settings conflict frequency forced duty cycle change If the square wave function is selected and you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 15 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 upper limit for this frequency Duty Cycle 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt
44. Fromthe front panel the starting phaseis always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the starting phase in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the function generator converts the phase to degrees TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS TRIGger SOURce Select the trigger source for the triggered burst mode only In the triggered burst mode the function generator outputs a waveform with the specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received After the specified number of cycles have been output the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger The default is IMM The SOUR query returns IMM EXT or BUS e When the Immediate internal source is selected the frequency at which the burst is generated is determined by the burst period BURS INT PER command e When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardwaretrigger applied tothe rear panel Trig In connector The function generator outputs the specified number of cycles each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by the TRIG SLOP command see page 222 External trigger signals that occur during a burst are ignored 221 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands e When the Bus software source is selected the function generator outputs one burst each time a bus t
45. Lock Commands These commands require Option 001 External Timebase Reference see page 248 for more information PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum PHASe MINimum MAXimum PHASe REFerence PHASe UNLock ERRor STATe OFF ON PHASe UNLock ERRor STATe UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian UNIT ANGLe Status Reporting Commands see page 260 for more information STB SRE lt eablevalue gt SRE STATus QUEStionable CONDition QUEStionable EVENt QUEStionable ENABle lt eablevalue gt QUEStionable ENABle ESR ESE lt eablevalue gt ESE CLS STATus PRESet Ppsc 0 1 PSC OPC Parameters shown in bold are selected following a RST reset command 159 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Calibration Commands see page 264 for more information CALibration CALibration SECure STATe OFF ON lt code gt SECure STATe SECure CODE lt new code gt SETup lt 0 1 2 3 94 gt SETup VALue lt value gt VALue COUNt STRing lt quoted string gt STRing IEEE 488 2 Common Commands CLS ESR ESE lt eablevalue gt ESE IDN LRN OPC OPC Ppsc o 1 PSC RST SAV 0 1 2 3 4 State 0 is the instrument state at power down RCL 0 1 2 3 4 States 1 through 4 areuser defined states STB SRE lt eablevalue gt SRE TRG TST 160 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Refe
46. OUTPut LOAD 50 Set the load impedance to 50 Ohms default WriteString VOLTage LOW 0 Low level 0 V WriteString VOLTage HIGH 0 75 High level 75 V WriteString PULSe PERiod le 3 1 ms intervals WriteString PULSe WIDTh 100e 6 Pulse width is 100 us WriteString PULSe TRANsition 10e 9 Edge time is 10 ns rise time fall time Turn on the instrument output WriteString OUTPut ON For I 0 To 18 Vary edge by 5 nsec steps WriteString PULSe TRANsition amp 0 00000001 I 0 000000005 Sleep 300 Wait 300 msec Next I End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 307 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example Pulse Width Modulation PWM This program found in the E xamples chapter6 PulseWidthM od subdirectory on the CD ROM configures a pulse waveform with duty cycle which is then slowly modulated by a triangle waveform Private Sub cmdPWM_Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib Formatted1I0488 Set Fgen IO io _mgr Open txtIO Text On Error GoTo MyError This program uses low level SCPI commands to configure the function gnerator to output an PWM waveform The pulse is set up with a duty cycle of 35 and a depth of 15 and will vary in width from 20 to 50 with the m
47. Specifications are subject to change without notice For thelatest specifications go to the Agilent 33220A product page and find the 33220A Datasheet www agilent com find 33220A This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001 Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB 001 du Canada N10149 Footnotes 1 Add 1 10th of output amplitude and offset specification per C for operation outside the range of 18 C to 28 C 2 Autorange enabled 3 DC offset set to 0 V 4 Spurious output at low amplitude is 75 dBm typical 5 Add 1 ppm C average for operation out side the range of 18 C to 28 C 6 FSK uses trigger input 1 MHz maximum 7 Sine and square waveforms above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count 339 Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Product Dimensions 7 ooo S 899 IEEE Leon e All dimensions are shown in millimeters 340 Index If you have questions relating to the operation of the Agilent 33220A call 1 800 452 4844 in the United States or contact your nearest Agilent Technologies Office 10 MHz In connector 248 10 MHz Out connector 248 33220A overview 2 CLS command 263 ESE command 262 DN com
48. Triggering Trigger Input Signal Trig In Out INPUT FSK Burst 2 5 to 5V gt gt 100ns ry OV Rising edge shown This rear panel connector is used in the following modes Triggered Sweep Mode To select the external source press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Ext softkey or execute the TRIG SOUR EXT command from the remote interface Sweep must be enabled When the rising or falling edge you specify which edge of a TTL pulse is received on the Trig In connector the function generator outputs a single sweep E xternally Modulated FSK Mode Toenablethe externally modulated mode press the Source softkey from the front panel or execute the FSK SOUR EXT command from the remote interface FSK must be enabled When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output The maximum external FSK rate is 100 kHz Triggered Burst Mode To select the external source press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Ext softkey or execute the TRIG SOUR EXT command from the remote interface burst must be enabled The function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received from the specified trigger source External Gated Burst Mode To enable the gated mode press the Gated softkey or execute the BURS MODE GAT command from the remote interface burst m
49. Width Wmin where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10s but lt 100 s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s e The pulse width deviation is limited by the current edge time setting Width Deviation lt Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse Width 1 6 X Edge Time 205 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands e Ifyou select the External modulating source PWM SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the width deviation to 10 us then a 5V signal level corresponds toa 10 us deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels produce negative deviation Note The operation of the PWM DEV command is affected by the FUNC PULS HOLD command see Pulse Configuration Commands on page 185 for further information The FUNC PULS HOLD command determines whether pulse width the default or pulse duty cycle values areto be hdd constant as the period is varied If the width is hdd so is thewidth deviation If theduty cycleis hdd sois theduty cycle deviation If duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are being head width deviation values specified with the PWM DEV command are automatically converted to the equivalent duty cycle deviation in
50. allowed with modulation sweep or burst the modulation or mode is turned off Sine Square Ramp Pulse Noise DC User AM FM PM FSK e e e Carrier PWM Carrier e Sweep Mode Burst Mode e e 1 Allowed in the External Gated burst mode only 172 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands Function Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum frequency is less than that of the current function the frequency is adjusted to the maximum value for the new function For example if you are currently outputting a 20 MHz sine wave and then change to the ramp function the function generator will automatically adjust the output frequency to 200 kHz the upper limit for ramps From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the frequency will be adjusted as described Amplitude Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum amplitude is less than that of the current function the amplitude is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new function This may occur when the output units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine in Vrms F
51. amplitude gt lt offsd gt Output a ramp wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset This command overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed APPLy PULSe lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offst gt Output a pulse wave with the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed e This command preserves the current pulse width setting FUNC PULS WIDT command or pulse duty cycle setting FUNC PULS DCYC command depending on which has been selected to hold FUNC PULS HOLD command The edge time setting FUNC PULS TRAN command is also preserved However based on the specified frequency the function generator will adjust the pulse width or edge time to comply with the frequency restrictions for pulse waveforms See page 185 for moreinformation on setting the pulse width and edgetime 169 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command APPLy NOISe lt frequency DEFault gt lt amplitude lt offse gt Output Gaussian noise with the specified amplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed e The frequency parameter has no effect for this command but you must specify a value or DEF ault the noise function has a 10 MHz bandwidth If you specify a frequency it has n
52. and aliasing Waveform components above the function generator s 3 dB bandwidth will be attenuated 316 Chapter 7 Tutorial Creating Arbitrary Waveforms For example consider an arbitrary waveform consisting of 10 cycles of a sine waveform When you set the function generator s frequency to 1 MHz the actual output frequency will be 10 MHz and the amplitude will be attenuated by approximately 3 dB As you increase the frequency above 1 MHz more attenuation will occur At approximately 2 5 MHz waveform distortion due to aliasing will become evident Some aliasing will be present in most arbitrary waveforms but whether or not it will be troublesome depends on your specific application When creating arbitrary waveforms the function generator will always attempt to replicate the finite length time record to produce a periodic version of the data in waveform memory However as shown below it is possible that the shape and phase of a signal may be such that a discontinuity is introduced at the end point When the waveshape is repeated for all time this end point discontinuity will introduce leakage errors in the frequency domain because many spectral terms are required to describe the discontinuity Leakage error is caused when the waveform record does not include an integral number of cycles of the fundamental frequency Power from the fundamental frequency and its harmonics is transferred to the spectral components of the rect
53. are the power on default states provided you have not enabled the power down recall mode see Instrument State Storage in chapter 3 If you area first time user of the SCPI language please refer to these sections to become familiar with the language before attempting to program the function generator 8 148 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary SCPI Command Summary Throughout this manual the following conventions are used for SCPI command syntax for remote interface programming The APPLy Commands see page 163 for moreinformation Square brackets indicate optional keywords or parameters Braces enclose parameters within a command string Triangle brackets lt gt enclose parameters for which you must substitute a value A vertical bar separates multiple parameter choices APPLy SINusoid lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offs amp t gt SQUare lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt RAMP lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offs amp gt PULSe lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt NOISe lt frequency DEF gt lt amplitude gt lt offset gt DC lt frequency DEF gt lt amplitude gt DEF gt lt offset gt USER lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offs amp t gt APPLy 1 This parameter has no efect for this command but you MUST specify a valueor
54. choose the Select Wform softkey to select the active waveform Remote nterface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 80 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 wHz 20 MHz Ramp 1 wHz 200 kHz Arbs 1 wHz 6 MHz e The carrie frequency must always be greater than or equal to the frequency deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the function generator will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency e Thesum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz 20 1 MHz for sine and square 300 kHz for ramp and 6 1 MHz for arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to set the deviation to a value that is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency e Front Pand Operation To set the carrier frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or num
55. connector Select the output termination 1Q to 10 kQ or Infinite Enable disable amplitude autoranging Select the waveform polarity normal or inverted Select the GPIB address Specify the LAN configuration IP address and network configuration Select how periods and commas are used in numbers displayed on the front panel Select the local language for front panel messages and help text Enable disable the tone heard when an error is generated Enable disable the display bulb saver mode Adjust the contrast setting of the front panel display Perform an instrument self test Secure unsecure the instrument for calibration and perform manual calibrations Query the instrument s firmware revision codes e e e e e e e e e e e e e View the list of Help topics e View the last message displayed e View the remote command error queue e Get HELP on any key How to generate a dc only voltage level How to generate a modulated waveform How to create an arbitrary waveform e How to reset the instrument to its default state e How to view a waveform in the Graph Mode e How to synchronize multiple instruments e How to obtain Agilent Technical Support 34 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Select the Output Termination To Select the Output Termination The Agilent 33220A has a fixed series output impedance of 50 ohms to the front panel Outp
56. e You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp e Front Pane Operation Press wily and select the Output Setup softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to select the desired load impedance or press the Load softkey again to choose High zZ e Remotelnterface Operation OUTPut LOAD lt ohms gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum 63 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Duty Cycle Square Waves The duty cycle of a square wave represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high leva assuming that the waveform is not inverted 20 Duty Cycle 80 Duty Cycle See Pulse Waveforms on page 70 for information about duty cycle for pulse waveforms e Duty Cycle 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz e Theduty cycleis stored in volatile memory the duty cycle is set to 50 the default when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming the Power On state is set to default e The duty cycle setting is remembered when you change from square wave to another function When you return to the square function the previous duty cycle is used e Limits Dueto Frequency If the square wave function is selected and you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automa
57. for numeric parameters like MINimum MAXimum and DEFault are also accepted You can also send engineering unit suffixes with numeric parameters e g Mhz or Khz If only specific numeric values are accepted the function generator will automatically round the input numeric parameters The following command uses a numeric parameter FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Discrete Parameters Discrete parameters are used to program settings that have a limited number of values like BUS IMMediate EXTernal They havea short form and a long form just like command keywords You can mix upper and lower case letters Query responses will always return the short form in all upper case letters The following command uses discrete parameters SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent a single binary condition that is either true or false For a false condition the function generator will accept OFF or 0 For a true condition the function generator will accept ON or 1 When you query a boolean setting the instrument will always return O or 1 The following command uses a boolean parameter AM STATe OFF ON String Parameters String parameters can contain virtually any set of ASCII characters A string must begin and end with matching quotes either with a single quote or a double quote You can include the quote delimiter as part of the string by typing it tw
58. is 16K samples long All of the 33220 s standard waveforms use the entire DAC range and are 16K samples in length Any arbitrary waveforms that use less than the entire DAC range or that are specified with fewer than 16 384 points will exhibit proportionally higher relative quantization errors 321 Variable Vref Waveform DAC Square Pulse DAC DC Offset Chapter 7 Tutorial Output Amplitude Control Output Amplitude Control The Agilent 33220A uses a variable reference voltage to control the signal amplitude over a 10 dB range As shown in the simplified block diagram below the output of the waveform DAC goes through an anti aliasing filter Switching circuitry selects either the waveform output or the output of the separate square pulse DAC Two attenuators 10 dB and 20 dB are used in various combinations to control the output amplitude in 10 dB steps over a wide range of amplitude values 10 mV pp to 10 Vpp Anti Aliasing Filter A 7 witching Faan Circuitry Attenuators Switching Main Circuitry Output O Output Amplifier Note that the dc offset is summed with the ac signal in the output amplifier This allows relatively small ac signals to be offset by relatively large dc voltages For example you can offset a 100 mVpp signal by almost 5 Vdc into a 500 load When changing ranges the 33220A switches attenuators such that the output voltage never exceeds the current amplitude sett
59. is overwritten and no error will be generated However you cannot overwrite any of the five built in waveforms e Upto four user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory If memory is full and you try to copy a new waveform to non volatile memory a Not enough memory error is generated Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile memory The default selection is EXP_ RISE e The following statement shows how to use the DATA COPY command to copy the VOLATILE waveform into named storage ARB_1 DATA COPY ARB 1 VOLATILE FUNCtion USER lt arb name gt VOLATILE FUNCtion USER Select one of the five built in arbitrary waveforms one of four user defined waveforms or the waveform currently downloaded to volatile memory The USER query returns EXP_RISE EXP_FALL NEG RAMP SINC CARDIAC VOLATILE or the name of any user defined waveforms in non volatile memory The default selection is EXP_RISE e Note that this command does not output the selected arbitrary waveform Use the FUNC USER command see the following page to output the selected waveform e Thenames of the five built in arbitrary waveforms are EXP_RISE EXP_FALL NEG RAMP SINC and CARDIA
60. of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge The pulse duty cycle range is 0 percent to 100 percent However the pulse duty cycle is limited by minimum pulse width and edge time restrictions which prevent you from setting exactly O percent or 100 percent For example for a 1 kHz pulse waveform you are typically restricted to pulse duty cycles in the range 0 002 percent to 99 998 percent limited by the minimum pulse width of 20 ns The default pulse duty cycle is 10 percent MIN is approximately 0 MAX is approximately 100 The Dcyc query returns the pulse duty cycle in percent The width and edge restrictions are described bed ow e The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following restrictions determined by the minimum pulse width Wmin The function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described Duty Cycle gt 100 X Wmin Period and Duty Cycle lt 100 X 1 Wmin Period where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100 s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s 188 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands e Thespecified pulse duty cycle may affect the edge time The edge time is adjusted first and
61. off 199 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands Frequency Shift Keying F SK Commands Seealso FSK Modulation starting on page 89 in chapter 3 FSK Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an FSK modulated waveform The commands used for FSK are listed on the next page Configure the carrier waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the carrier waveform You can select a sine Square ramp or arbitrary waveform for the carrier pulse noise and dc are not allowed Select the FSK source The function generator will accept an internal or external FSK source Select the FSK source using the FSK SOUR command Select the FSK hop frequency Set the alternate or hop frequency to any value from 1 wHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms using the FSK FREQ command Set the FSK rate Set the FSK rate to any value from 2 mHz to 100 kHz using the FSK INT RATE command internal FSK source only The FSK rate sets the pace at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and the hop frequency Enable FSK modulation After you have set up the other FSK parameters use the FSK STAT ON command to enable FSK modulation 200 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Re
62. outputs a continuous three cycle burst if the output is enabled 5 View the waveform Press 2 to view the waveform parameters 4 TE tite You can generate a single burst with the specified count by pressing the key For more information see To Trigger a Sweep or Burst on page 46 You can also use an external gate signal to either turn the burst signal on or off based on the external signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector For more information see Burst Mode on page 106 45 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Trigger a Sweep or Burst To Trigger a Sweep or Burst You can issue triggers from the front panel for sweeps and bursts using a manual trigger or an internal trigger e Internal or automatic triggering is enabled with the default settings of the function generator In this mode the function generator outputs continuously when the sweep or burst mode is selected e Manual triggering initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time you press the rss key from the front panel Continue pressing this key toretrigger the function generator e The key is disabled when in remote the remote icon turns on while in remote and when a function other than sweep or burst is currently selected or when the output is disabled The Cisse flashes off momentarily when using a manual trigger 46 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operati
63. pie ee S N 8192 16383 1809 360 DAC i Memory Address Code 4096 12288 Phase 909 270 pa 8191 Sine Wave Representation in Waveform M emory Direct digital synthesis DDS generators use a phase accumulation technique to control waveform memory addressing Instead of using a counter to generate sequential memory addresses an adder is used see the following page On each dock cycle the constant loaded into the phase increment register PIR is added to the present result in the phase accumulator The most significant bits of the phase accumulator output are used to address waveform memory By changing the PIR constant the number of clock cycles required to step through the entire waveform memory changes thus changing the output frequency The PIR determines how fast the phase value changes with time and thereby controls the frequency being synthesized More bits in the phase accumulator result in finer frequency resolution Since the PIR affects only the rate of change of the phase value and not the phase itself changes in waveform frequency are phase continuous 314 Chapter 7 Tutorial Direct Digital Synthesis Phase Increment Register PIR 1D 64 Bits aw ee MSBs 64 Bits 64 Bits 140r16bits Waveform Memory Address Phase Register Phase Accumulator Circuitry The 33220A uses a 64 bit phase accumulator which yields 2 x 50 MHz or 2 7 picohertz
64. previous UNIT ANGL command not available for pulse and noise Select from 360 degrees to 360 degrees or 2r to 2n radians The default is 0 degrees 0 radians MIN 360 degrees 2r radians MAX 360 degrees 2r radians The PHAS query returns the phase offset in degrees or radians 248 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only e The specified phase adjustment causes a bump or hop in the output waveform in order to change the phase relationship to the external signal to which it is currently locked e This phase adjustment for phase lock applications is independent of the burst phase as set by the BURS PHAS command see page 220 UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian UNIT ANGLe Select degrees or radians to set the phase offset value using the PHAS command remote interface only The default is DEG The ANGL query returns DEG or RAD e From the front panel the phase offset is always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the phase offset in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the function generator converts the phase offset to degrees PHASe REFerence Immediately set the zero phase reference point without changing the output of the function generator This command does not change the phase offset as set with the PHAS command it only changes the phase reference This command does n
65. previous state An instrument reset does not affect the configurations stored in memory Once a state is stored it remains until it is overwritten or specifically deleted 127 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Front Pand Operation Press and then select the Store State or Recall State softkey To delete a stored state select the Delete State softkey also removes the custom name for this memory location To configure the function generator to recall the factory default state at power on press and then select the Pwr On Default softkey To configure the function generator to recall the power down state when power is restored press and select the Pwr On Last softkey You can assign a custom name to each of the four storage locations e The custom name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character _ e Toadd additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob e Todeleteall characters tothe right of the cursor press the key Remote Interface Operation SAV 0 1 2 3 RCL 0 1 2 3 4 State0 is theinstrument state at power down 4 States 1 2 3 and 4 are user defined states To assign a custom name to a stored state to be recalled from the front panel send the following command From the
66. rate of the burst waveform in the triggered and external gated modes In the triggered mode the number of cycles specified by the burst count is output at the waveform frequency In the external gated mode the waveform frequency is output when the external gate signal is true Keep in mind that the waveform frequency is different than the burst period which specifies the interval between bursts triggered mode only Waveform frequency 1 wHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default waveform frequency is 1 kHz For an internally triggered burst waveform the minimum frequency is 2 001 mHz You can select a sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveform noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode and dc is not allowed For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count Front Pand Operation To set the waveform frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote Interface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 109 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Count The burst count defines the number of cycles to be output per burst Used in thetriggered burst mode only internal or external
67. remote interface when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Provided that the Power On state is set to Default e Front Paned Operation After enabling sweeps or bursts press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired source by pressing the Source softkey e Remotelnterface Operation TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS The APPLy command automatically sets the source to Immediate Internal Triggering In theinternal trigger mode the function generator continuously outputs the sweep or burst as specified by the sweep time or burst period This is the default trigger source for both front panel and remote interface use e Front Pand Operation Press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Int softkey e Remotelnterface Operation TRIGger SOURce IMMediate Manual Triggering n the manual trigger mode front panel only you can manually trigger the function generator by pressing the front panel key The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst for each time you press the key The key is illuminated while the function generator is waiting for a manual trigger the key is disabled when in remote 116 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering External Triggering In the external trigger mode the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each t
68. result of a device failure or extreme conditions such as lightning or strong magnetic fields Queue overflow The error queue is full because more than 20 errors have occurred No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue The error queue is cleared by the cLs clear status command or when the power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the queue The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset RST command 293 410 420 430 440 Chapter 5 Error Messages Query Errors Query Errors Query INTERRUPTED A command was received but the output buffer contained data from a previous command the previous data is lost Query UNTERMINATED The function generator was addressed to talk i e to send data over the interface but a command has not been received which sends data to the output buffer For example you may have executed an APPLy command which does not generate data and then attempted an Enter statement to read data from the interface Query DEADLOCKED A command was received which generates too much data to fit in the output buffer and the input buffer is also full Command execution continues but all data is lost Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response The IDN command must be the last query command within a command string Example IDN SYST VERS 294 Chapter 5 Error Messages Instrument Errors Instrument Errors 501 to 5
69. signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector When the gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform For a noise waveform the output stops immediately when the gate signal goes false 334 Specifications Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Waveforms Standard Sine Square Ramp Triangle Pulse Noise DC Exponential rise Exponential fall Negative ramp Sin x x Cardiac Built in Arbitrary Waveform Characteristics Sine Frequency 1 uHz to 20 MHz 1 Hz resolution Amplitude Flatness 1 2 Relative to 1 kHz lt 100 kHz 0 1 dB 100 kHz to 5 MHz 0 15 dB 5 MHz to 20 MHz 0 3 dB Harmonic Distortion 21 31 lt 1 Vpp gt 1 Vpp DC to 20 kHz 70 dBc 70 dBc 20 kHz to 100 kHz 65 dBc 60 dBc 100 kHz to 1 MHz 50 dBc 45 dBc 1 MHz to 20 MHz 40 dBc 35 dBc Total Harmonic Distortion 21 S DC to 20 kHz 0 04 Spurious Non Harmonic Output 2I 41 DC to 1 MHz 70 dBc 1 MHz to 20 MHz 70 dBc 6 dB octave Phase Noise 10 kHz offset 115 dBc Hz typical Square Frequency Rise Fall Time Overshoot Variable Duty Cycle Asymmetry 50 Duty
70. source e Burst count 1 to 50 000 cycles in 1 cycle increments You can also select an infinite burst count The default is 1 yde e When theInternal trigger source is selected the specified number of cycles is output continuously at a rate determined by the burst period setting The burst period defines the interval between bursts e When the Internal trigger source is selected the burst count must be less than the product of the burst period and the waveform frequency as shown below Burst Count lt Burst Period X Waveform Frequency e The function generator will automatically increase the burst period up to its maximum value to accommodate the specified burst count but the waveform frequency will not be changed e When the gated burst mode is selected the burst count is ignored However if you change the burst count from the remote interface while in the gated mode the function generator remembers the new count and will use it when the triggered mode is selected e Front Pand Operation To set the burst count press the Cycles softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the count To select an infinite count burst instead press the Cycles softkey again to toggle to the Infinite softkey press once to start the waveform and a second time to stop it e Remotelnterface Operation BURSt NCYCles lt cydes gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum 110 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Per
71. termination The following steps show you how to change the frequency to 1 2 MHz Press the Freq softkey The displayed frequency is either the power on value or the frequency previously selected When you change functions the same frequency is used if the present value is valid for the new function To set the waveform period instead press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey the current selection is highlighted 1 00 000 00 kHz y Period HiLevel LoLevel Enter the magnitude of the desired frequency Using the numeric keypad enter the value 1 2 Qa key below A FH MHz CANCEL Select the desired units Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units When you select the units the function generator outputs a waveform with the displayed frequency if the output is enabled For this example press MHz 1 00 000 00MHz A Ampl Period HiLevel LoLewel Note You can also enter thedesired value using the knob and cursor keys 17 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the Output Amplitude To Set the Output Amplitude At power on the function generator outputs a sine wave with an amplitude of 100 mV peak to peak into a 50Q termination The following steps show you how to change the amplitude to 50 mVrms Press the Ampl softkey The displayed amplitude is either the power on value or the amplitude previously selected When you change functions
72. the Agilent 33220A using SCPI commands All of these programs are written in Microsoft Visual BASIC 6 0 and use the Agilent VISA COM objects The BASIC programs in this chapter and other example programs illustrating the use of several drivers and environments are included on the Agilent IntuiLink for the 33220A Waveform Generator CD ROM shipped with the function generator For a detailed description of these programs refer to the readme file in the Examples directory The programs in this chapter are found in the E xamples chapter6 subdirectory If you want to modify the example programs or write your own programs and compile them you will need to install the Agilent E2094 I O Libraries software Ifyou are using GPIB The Agilent E2094 I O Libraries software is provided with Agilent GPIB I O products The software should have been loaded when you installed your GPIB interface card in your PC Ifyou are using USB or LAN You must have version M order Agilent product number E2094M or a later version to support USB and LAN For information on obtaining the I O Libraries software go to www agilent com find iolib Microsoft and Visual BASIC are U S registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation 302 Chapter 6 Application Programs Introduction Once you have installed the appropriate software components see Remote nterface Configuration in chapter 3 for information on co
73. the Select Wform softkey to select the active waveform e Remote nterface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can alsouse the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 wHz 20 MHz Ramp 1 wHz 200 kHz Arbs 1 wHz 6 MHz e Front Pand Operation To set the carrier frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency e Remotelnterface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can alsouse the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 75 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Modulating Waveform Shape The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for AM e Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle 1 e Ramp has 100 symmetry a e Triangle has 50 symmetry AN Negative ramp has 0 symmetry gt e You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the c
74. the carrier is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source For moreinformation on the fundamentals of Amplitude Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select AM Modulation e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable AM and FM at the same time When you enable AM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow AM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable AM the sweep or burst mode is turned off e Front Pane Operation You must enable AM before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Press oc and then select AM using the Type softkey The AM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage e Remotelnterface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable AM after you have set up the other modulation parameters AM STATe OFF ON 74 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Carrier Waveform Shape e AM carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform Thedefault is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform e Front Pane Operation Press any of the front pane function keys except Pulse se ab J and then choose
75. the selection of the pulse waveform function APPL PULS or FUNC PULS command Data out of range burst period value clipped to This generic message indicates that the burst period has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range burst count value clipped to This generic message indicates that the burst count has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range burst period limited by length of burst value clipped to lower limit It is not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the function generator to output with the specified burst count and frequency see bel ow If the burst period is too short the function generator will automatically adjust it as needed to continuously re trigger the burst Burst Period gt Burst Count__ 999 ns Waveform Frequency Data out of range burst count limited by length of burst value clipped to upper limit If the mmediate trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the burst count must be less than the product of the burst period and the waveform frequency as shown below Burst Count lt Burst Period X Waveform Frequency 289 222 222 222 222 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Data out of range amplitude value clipped to This generic message indicates that the waveform amplitude has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range of
76. then the duty cycle to accommodate the specified period conforming to the following restriction From theremote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the edge time and duty cycle will belimited as described Duty Cycle gt 100 X 1 6 X Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle lt 100 X 1 1 6 X Edge Time Period Note This command is affected by the FUNC PULS HOLD command which determines the valueto be hdd constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or the specified pulse duty cycle value See the FUNC PULS HOLD command for further information FUNCtion PULSe TRANsition lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion PULSe TRANsition MINimum MAXimum Set the edge time in seconds for both the rising and falling edges The edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 threshold of each edge You can vary the edge time from 5 ns to 100 ns see restrictions bd ow The default edge time is 5 ns MIN 5 ns MAX 100 ns The TRAN query returns the edge time in seconds e The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as shown below The function generator will limit the edge time as needed to accommodate the specified pulse width or duty cyde From the remote interface a Settings Conflict error will be generated and the edgetimewill belimited as described EdgeTime lt 0 625 X Pulse Width or in terms of duty cycle EdgeTime lt 0 625 X P
77. to the maximum value allowed with the offset voltage specified Vpp lt 2X Vmax Voffset Settings conflict low level changed due to high level You can set the levels to a positive or negative value but note that the high level must always be greater than the low level If you specify a high level that is less than the existing low level the function generator will automatically set the low level to be 1 mV less than the high level 286 221 222 222 222 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict high level changed due to low level You can set the levels to a positive or negative value but note that the high level must always be greater than the low level If you specify a low level that is greater than the existing high level the function generator will automatically set the high level to be 1 mV greater than the low level Data out of range value clipped to upper limit The specified parameter is outside of the function generator s capability The function generator has adjusted the parameter to the maximum value allowed Example PHAS 1000 Data out of range value clipped to lower limit The specified parameter is outside of the function generator s capability The function generator has adjusted the parameter to the minimum value allowed Example PHAS 1000 Data out of range pulse edge time limited by period value clipped to upper limit The specifi
78. trigger external When the eternal trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time Settings conflict trigger output connector used by FSK If you have enabled FSK and have selected the external source FSK SOUR EXT command the trigger out signal cannot be enabled OUTP TRIG ON command The rear panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time Settings conflict trigger output connector used by burst gate If you have selected the gated burst mode BURS MODE GAT command with burst enabled the trigger out signal cannot be enabled OUTP TRIG ON command The rear panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time 279 221 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict trigger output connector used by trigger external When the eternal trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time Settings conflict frequency reduced for user function For arbitrary waveforms the output frequency is limited to 6 MHz When you change to the arbitrary waveform function APPL USER or FUNC USER co
79. trigger source Internal External or Manual Thedefault is Internal e When the Internal immediate source is selected the frequency at which the burst is generated is determined by the burst period e When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardwaretrigger applied tothe rear panel Trig In connector The function generator outputs the specified number of cycles each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the specified polarity External trigger signals that occur during a burst are ignored e When the Manual source is selected the function generator outputs one burst each time the front panel key is pressed e When the External or Manual trigger source is selected the burst count and burst phaseremain in effect but the burst period is ignored e Front Pand Operation Press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the desired source by pressing the Source softkey To specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the signal on the Trig In connector press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Slope softkey 113 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode e Remotelnterface Operation TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS Use the following command to specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the Trig In connector TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative See Triggering on
80. use this capability Use the Status Byte enable register SRE command toselect which condition bits will assert the I E E E 488 SRQ line If bit 6 RQS transitions from a 0 toa 1 then an EEE 488 service request message is sent to your computer The computer may then poll the instruments on the interface bus to identify which one is asserting the service request line that is the instrument with bit 6 set in its Serial Poll response When a Serial Poll is issued bit 6 RQS is cleared in the Serial Poll response no other bits are affected and the service request line is cleared The Master Summary Bit in the STB response is not cleared To obtain the Serial Poll response send an EEE 488 Serial Poll message The instrument sends a one byte binary response Performing a Serial Poll is handled automatically by the I E E E 488 bus interface hardware Unlike ASCII commands and some other GPIB commands a Serial Poll is executed immediately and does not involve the instrument s main processor Therefore the status indicated by a Serial Poll may not necessarily indicate the effect of the most recent command Use the OPC command to guarantee that commands previously sent to the instrument have completed before executing a Serial Poll Using STB to Read the Status Byte The STB command is similar to a Serial Poll but it is processed like any other ASCII instrument command The STB command retur
81. using a high quality coaxial cable and ground it at the load through the cable s shield If possible make sure the function generator and the load are connected to the same electrical outlet to minimize further differences in ground potential 324 Chapter 7 Tutorial Attributes of AC Signals Attributes of AC Signals The most common ac signal is a sine wave In fact any periodic signal can be represented as the sum of different sine waves The magnitude of a sine wave is usually specified by its peak peak to peak or root mean square RMS value All of these measures assume that the waveform has zero offset voltage wee S N VPeak Veams 0 707 Vpeak Vek Pk i Kn V The peak voltage of a waveform is the maximum absolute value of all points in the waveform The peak to peak voltage is the difference between the maximum and minimum The RMS voltage is found by summing the squares of the voltages of every point in the waveform dividing the sum by the number of points and then taking the square root of that quotient The RMS value of a waveform also represents the one cycle average power in the signal Power Vanys R Crest factor is the ratio of a signal s peak value to its RMS value and will differ according to waveshape The table below shows several common waveforms with their respective crest factors and RMS values Waveform Crest Factor Shape C F AC RMS AC DC RMS aa
82. vuy and select the Output Setup softkey Then press the Normal softkey again to toggle between the Normal and Invert selections Remote nterface Operation OUTPut POLarity NORMal INVerted 67 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Sync Output Signal A sync output is provided on the front panel Sync connector All of the standard output functions except dc and noise have an associated Sync signal For certain applications where you may not want to output the Sync signal you can disable the Sync connector e By default the Sync signal is routed to the Sync connector enabled When the Sync signal is disabled the output level on the Sync connector is at a logic low level e When a waveform is inverted see Waveform Polarity on the previous page the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted e The Sync signal setting is overridden by the setting of the marker used with the sweep mode see page 103 Therefore when the marker is enabled and the sweep mode is also enabled the Sync signal setting is ignored e For sine ramp and pulse waveforms the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal is a TTL high when the waveform s output is positive relative to zero volts or the dc offset value The Sync signal is a TTL low when the output is negative relative to zero volts or the dc offset value e For squarewavefor
83. waveform to 10 ms T 000 000ms M High Lowy Interp Init Edit Limit Limit Off Points Points 4 Set the waveform voltage limits Press the High V Limit and Low V Limit softkeys to set the upper and lower voltage levels that can be reached while editing the waveform The upper limit must be greater than the lower limit By default Point 1 is set equal to the upper limit and Point 2 is set equal tothe lower limit For this example set the upper limit to 3 0 V and thelowe limit to 0 V 000 0 V Ew i Cycle High Y f LowY Interp Init Edit Feriod Limit Limit Off Points Points 121 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms Select the interpolation method Press the Interp softkey to enable or disable linear interpolation between waveform points this feature is available from the front panel only With interpolation enabled default the waveform editor makes a straight line connection between points With interpolation disabled the waveform editor maintains a constant voltage level between points and creates a step like waveform For this example turn on linear interpolation Set the initial number of waveform points You can create an arbitrary waveform with up to 16 384 16K points from the front panel The waveform editor initially builds a waveform with two points and automatically connects the last point of the waveform to the voltage level of the first point to create a contin
84. 0 X 1 1 6 X Edge Time Period e Front Pand Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Dty Cyc softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired duty cycle e Remotelnterface Operation FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum 72 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Waveforms Edge Time The edge time sets each edge transition time rising and falling of the pulse The rise time and fall time cannot be set independentl y each is equal to the edge time For each transition the edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 threshold Edge time 5 ns to 100 ns see restrictions below The default edge timeis 5 ns The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as shown below The function generator will adjust the edge time as needed to accommodate the specified pulse width Edge Time lt 0 625 X Pulse Width or in terms of duty cycle Edge Time lt 0 625 X Period X Duty Cycle 100 Front Pand Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Edge Time softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired edge time Remote nterface Operation FUNCtion PULSe TRANsition lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 73 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Amplitude Modulation AM A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform In AM the amplitude of
85. 0 radians MIN 360 degrees 2r radians MAX 360 degrees 27 The PHAS query returns the starting phase in degrees or radians e For sine square and ramp waveforms 0 degrees is the point at which the waveform crosses zero volts or the dc offset value in a positive going direction For arbitrary waveforms 0 degrees is the first waveform point downloaded to memory This command has no effect on pulse or noise waveforms e The burst phase is also used in the gated burst mode When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops The output will remain at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase 220 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands BURSt STATe OFF oON BURSt STATe Disable or enable the burst mode To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable the burst mode after you have set up the other burst parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or ayn ON e The function generator will not allow the burst mode to be enabled at the same time that sweep or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable burst the sweep or modulation mode is turned off UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian UNIT ANGLe Select degrees or radians to set the starting phase for the burst with the BURS PHAS command remote interface only The default is DEG The ANGL query returns DEG or RAD e
86. 02 501 Cross isolation UART framing error 502 Cross isolation UART overrun error These errors indicate an internal hardware failure The isolation between chassis ground circuits and floating circuits is controlled by an optical isolation barrier and a Serial link 580 Reference phase locked loop is unlocked The PHAS UNL ERR STAT has been enabled on and the internal phase locked loop that controls the frequency is currently unlocked This error is most likely to occur when the external reference is out of lock range 295 601 603 604 605 606 616 619 to 621 623 to 625 Chapter 5 Error Messages Self Test Errors Self Test Errors The following errors indicate failures that may occur during a self test Refer to the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for more information Self test failed system logic This error indicates a failure of the main processor U101 system RAM U102 or system ROM U 103 Self test failed waveform logic This error indicates that the waveform logic in the synthesis IC U501 has failed Self test failed waveform memory bank This error indicates that either the waveform RAM U502 or the synthesis IC U501 has failed Self test failed modulation memory bank This error indicates that the modulation memory bank in the synthesis IC U501 has failed Self test failed cross isolation interface This error indicates that the cross isolation interface between the m
87. 2 20 e Subnet Mask e 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway e 0 0 0 0 DNS Server e 0 0 0 0 Host Name none Domain Name none Calibration Factory Setting Calibration State Secured Parameters marked with a bullet are stored in non volatile memory 146 Remote Interface Reference Remote Interface Reference e SCPI Command Summary on page 149 scr e Simplified Programming Overview on page 161 4 N e Using the APPLy Command on page 163 e Output Configuration Commands on page 172 e Pulse Configuration Commands on page 185 e Amplitude Modulation AM Commands on page 190 e Frequency Modulation FM Commands on page 193 e Phase Modulation PM Commands on page 197 e Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands on page 200 e Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands on page 203 e Frequency Sweep Commands on page 208 e Burst Mode Commands on page 216 e Triggering Commands on page 224 e Arbitrary Waveform Commands on page 227 e State Storage Commands on page 238 e System Related Commands on page 242 e Interface Configuration Commands on page 247 e Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only on page 248 e TheSCPI Status System on page 250 e Status Reporting Commands on page 260 e Calibration Commands on page 264 6 4 An Introduction to the SCPI Language on page 266 e Using Device Clear on page 271 Throughout this manual default states and values are identified These
88. 220A Service Guide for instructions on returning the instrument to Agilent for service e Front Pane Operation Press wiv and then select the Self Test softkey from the Test Cal menu e Remotelnterface Operation TST Returns 0 if the self test passes or 1 if it fails If the self test fails an error message is also generated with additional information on why the test failed 131 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Display Control For security reasons or to speed up the rate at which the function generator can execute commands from the remote interface you may want to turn off the front panel display From the remote interface you can also display a 12 character message on the front panel e You can only disable the front panel display by sending a command from the remote interface you cannot disable the front panel whilein local operation e When disabled the front panel display is blanked however the bulb used to backlight the display remains enabled All keys except Le are locked out when the display is disabled e Sending a message to the front panel display from the remote interface overrides the display state This means that you can display a message even if the display is currently disabled remote interface errors are always displayed even if the display is disabled e The display is automatically enabled when power is cycled after an instrument rese
89. 27 To Rack Mount the Function Generator 29 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation 31 Front Panel Menu Reference 33 To Select the Output Termination 35 To Reset the Function Generator 35 To Output a Modulated Waveform 36 To Output an FSK Waveform 38 To Output a PWM Waveform 40 To Output a Frequency Sweep 42 To Output a Burst Waveform 44 To Trigger a Sweep or Burst 46 To Store the Instrument State 47 To Configure the Remote Interface 48 U9 U05 Chapter 3 Features and Functions 53 Output Configuration 55 Pulse Waveforms 70 Amplitude Modulation AM 74 Frequency Modulation FM 79 Phase Modulation PM 85 Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation 89 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 93 Frequency Sweep 99 Burst Mode 106 G x e O Contents Triggering 115 Arbitrary Waveforms 120 System Related Operations 126 Remote Interface Configuration 135 Calibration Overview 141 Factory Default Settings 145 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference 147 SCPI Command Summary 149 Simplified Programming Overview 161 Using the APPLy Command 163 Output Configuration Commands 172 Pulse Configuration Commands 185 Amplitude Modulation AM Commands 190 Frequency Modulation FM Commands 193 Phase Modulation PM Commands 197 Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands 200 Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands 203 Frequency Sweep Commands 208 Burst Mode Commands 216 Triggering Commands 224 Arbitrar
90. 309 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Download data points to volatile memory txtError SelText Downloading Arb amp vbCrLf With Fgen WriteString DATA VOLATILE amp DataStr End With txtError SelText Download Complete amp vbCrLf Set up arbitrary waveform and output With Fgen WriteString DATA COPY PULSE VOLATILE Copy arb to non volatile memory WriteString FUNCtion USER PULSE Select the active arb waveform WriteString FUNCtion SHAPe USER Output the selected arb waveform WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 Output termination is 50 Ohms WriteString FREQuency 5000 VOLTage 5 Output frequency is 5 kHz t 5 Vpp WriteString OUTPut ON Enable Output End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 310 T utorial Tutorial In order to achieve the best performance from the Agilent 33220A it may be helpful for you to gain a better understanding of theinternal operations of the instrument This chapter describes basic signal generation concepts and gives specific details on the internal operations of the function generator e Direct Digital Synthesis on page 313 e Creating Arbitrary Waveforms on page 316 e Square Waveform Generation on page 318 e Pulse Waveform Generation on page 319 e Signal Imperfections on page 320 e Output Amplitude Control on page 322 e Ground Loops on page 323 e Attributes of AC
91. 4 output function allowed with modulation 55 amplitude limitations 56 frequency limitations 56 modulation modes allowed 172 pulse period limitations 186 output impedance 323 output load 63 output overload 181 output period front panel selection 17 output resistance 35 output termination 35 63 323 output units 62 dBm limitation 184 output waveform polarity 67 overheating 30 overload output 181 overload voltage 66 overview display 4 front panel 3 front panel menus 33 number entry 5 product 2 programming 161 rear panel 6 P parameter types 270 password calibration 141 peak frequency deviation FM 83 195 peak voltage 325 peak to peak voltage 325 percent modulation AM 77 192 328 period burst mode 111 front panel selection 17 pulse waveform 70 period pulse 185 PHASe REF erence command 249 phase burst 112 PHASe command 248 phase errors 321 phase lock 248 error on unlock 249 phase offset 248 rear panel connections 248 phase modulation carrier frequency 86 carrier waveform 86 modulating frequency 199 modulating source 88 198 modulating waveform 87 modulation waveshape 198 overview 197 phase deviation 88 199 phase noise 321 336 phase offset phase lock 248 phase quantization errors 321 phase units burst phase 221 phase burst 220 347 Index PM 87 carrier frequency 86 carrier waveform 86 DEViation command 199 INT command 198 INTernal FREQuency command 199 FUNCtion 198 mo
92. Bus software source is selected the function generator initiates one sweep each time a bus trigger command is received Totrigger the function generator from the remote interface GPIB USB or LAN send the TRG trigger command The front panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger The APPLy command automatically sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to TRIG SOUR IMM command To ensure synchronization when the Bus source is selected send the WAI wait command When the wAI command is executed the function generator waits for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands For example the following command string guarantees that the first trigger is accepted and the operation is executed before the second trigger is recognized TRIG SOUR BUS TRG WAI TRG WAI You can use the opc operation complete query command or the OPC operation complete command to signal when the sweep is complete The opc command returns 1 to the output buffer when the sweep is complete The oPc command sets the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register when the sweep is complete 213 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SLOPe Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling edge of the trigger signal on the rear panel Trig I
93. Byte enable register e A PSC 0 preserves the contents of the enable register through power cycles 260 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Status Reporting Commands Questionable Data Register Commands See the table on page 256 for the register bit definitions STATus QUEStionable CONDition Query the condition register in this group This is a read only register and bits are not cleared when you read the register A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Query the event register in this register group This is a read only register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by this command or cLs clear status command A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt eablevalue gt STATus QUEStionable ENABle Enable bits in the enable register in this register group The selected bits are then reported to the Status Byte A cLs clear status will not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register The STATus PRESet command clears all bits in the enable register To enable bits in the enable register you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits you wish to enable in the register The ENAB qu
94. C e Toselect the waveform currently stored in volatile memory specify the VOLATILE parameter The keyword VOLATILE does not have a short form e If you select a waveform name that is not currently downloaded a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated 233 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands e The function generator does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Therefore ARB_1 and arb_1 are the same name All characters are converted to upper case e Usethe DATA CAT command to list the names of the five built in waveforms non volatile VOLATILE if a waveform is currently downloaded to volatile memory and the names of any user defined waveforms non volatile FUNCtion USER FUNCtion Select the arbitrary waveform function and output the current arbitrary waveform When executed this command outputs the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC USER command see the previous page The selected waveform is output using the current frequency amplitude and offset voltage settings The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP PULS NOIS DC or USER e Usethe APPLy command or the equivalent FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the frequency amplitude and offset of the waveform The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC
95. ER command 170 APPLy command 163 operations performed 163 APPLy command 171 arbitrary waveform downloading binary values 230 downloading floating point values 229 downloading integer values 230 front panel operation 26 arbitrary waveform limitations 176 arbitrary waveforms amplitude limitations 166 as modulating waveshape 125 built in waveforms 26 228 calculating crest factor 237 creating from front panel 120 deleting from memory 236 error messages 299 front panel rules 123 naming 124 overview 227 point interpolation 122 rules 125 tutorial description 316 attenuator settings 179 automatic power down recall 241 autorange 179 322 autoranging amplitude 66 341 Index B balun effect 324 beep enable disable 245 246 beeper 130 binary block format 231 binary download arbs 230 bit definitions questionable data register 256 standard event register 258 status byte register 252 blank display 130 block format binary 231 BNC Modulation In 78 84 92 98 brightness display 131 built in arbitrary waveforms 228 names 233 built in help system 27 bulb saver mode 130 bumpers removing 29 BURSt GATE POLarity command 223 225 INTernal PERiod command 220 MODE command 218 NCY Cles command 219 PHASe command 220 STATe command 221 Burst 110 burst 106 burst count 110 219 burst period 111 220 burst phase 112 burst type 107 external gated mode 107 external trigger source 118 front panel operat
96. FF ON ONCE The APPLy command overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging Output Control You can disable or enable the front panel Output connector By default the output is disabled at power on to protect other equipment When enabled the key is illuminated e If an excessive external voltage is applied to the front panel Output connector an error message will be displayed and the output will be disabled To re enable the output remove the overload from the Output connector and press to enable the output e Front Pand Operation Press to enable or disable the output 66 Waveform Polarity In the normal mode default the waveform goes positive during the first part of the cycle In the inverted mode the waveform goes negative during the first part of the cycle Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Remote nterface Operation OUTPut OFF ON The APPLy command overrides the current setting and automatically enables the Output connector As shown in the examples below the waveform is inverted rdative to the offset voltage Any offset voltage present will remain unchanged when the waveform is inverted Normal Inverted Normal Inverted WAR ue A b b S a Ve Y as Offset Ne SY k IX A No Offset Voltage With Offset Voltage When a waveform is inverted the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted Front Pand Operation Press
97. GPIB Function Change 111 ms 111 ms 111 ms Frequency Change 1 5 ms 2 7 ms 1 2 ms Amplitude Change 30 ms 30 ms 30 ms Select User Arb 124 ms 124 ms 123 ms Arb Download Times binary transfer LAN USB 2 0 VXI 11 GPIB 64 K points 96 9 ms 191 7ms 336 5 ms 16 K points 24 5 ms 48 4 ms 80 7 ms 4 K points 7 3 MS 14 6 ms 19 8 ms Download times do not include setup or output time 338 General Power Supply Power Consumption Operating Environment Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Operating Altitude Storage Temperature State Storage Memory Interface Language Dimensions W x H x D Bench Top Rack Mount Weight Safety Designed to EMC Tested to Vibration and Shock Acoustic Noise Warm up Time Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator CAT II 100 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 5 10 100 to 120 V 400 Hz 10 50 VA maximum IEC 61010 Pollution Degree 2 Indoor Location 0 C to 55 C 5 to 80 RH non condensing Up to 3000 meters 30 C to 70 C Power off state automatically saved Four user configurable stored states GPIB USB and LAN standard SCPI 1993 IEEE 488 2 261 1 mm by 103 8 mm by 303 2 mm 212 8 mm by 88 3 mm by 272 3 mm 3 4 kg 7 5 lbs UL 1244 CSA 1010 EN61010 MIL 461C EN55011 EN50082 1 MIL T 28800 Type Ill Class 5 30 dBa 1 hour Note
98. If you change the output termination setting the displayed voltage levels will be automatically adjusted and no error will be generated For example if you set the high level to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the voltage displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 200 mVdc If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed voltage will drop in half Sethe OUTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information Toinvert the waveform relative to the offset voltage you can use the OUTP POL command See page 183 for more information VOLTage RANGe AUTO OFF ON ONCE VOLTage RANGe AUTO Disable or enable voltage autoranging for all functions In the default mode autoranging is enabled ON and the function generator automatically selects the optimal settings for the output amplifier and attenuators With autoranging disabled OFF the function generator uses the current amplifier and attenuator settings The AUTO query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON The APPLy command overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging ON The advantage of disabling autoranging is to eliminate momentary disruptions caused by switching of the attenuators while changing amplitude However the amplitude and offset accuracy and resolution as well as waveform fidelity may be adversely affected when reduc
99. Invalid security code specified with the CAL SEC STAT ON command Calibration error provided value is out of range The calibration value specified with the CAL VAL command is out of range Calibration error signal input is out of range Theinternal analog to digital converter ADC has determined that the signal applied to the rear panel Modulation In connector is out of range 707 Calibration error cal edge time rise time cal error 707 Calibration error cal edge time fall time cal error 707 Calibration error cal edge time default values loaded Indicates a failure in the rise time or fall time circuitry has prevented calibration The edge time was calibrated using default values limiting accuracy See the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for service information Calibration error setup is invalid You have specified an invalid calibration setup number with the CAL SET command Refer to the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for more information on the calibration procedures Calibration error setup is out of order Certain calibration setups must be performed in a specific sequence in order to be valid Refer to the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for more information on the calibration procedures 298 770 781 781 782 784 785 Chapter 5 Error Messages Arbitrary Waveform Errors Arbitrary Waveform Errors The following errors indicate failures that may occur during arbitrary waveform operation Refer to
100. Jitter RMS Ramp Triangle Frequency Linearity Variable Symmetry Pulse Frequency Pulse Width period lt 10 s Variable Edge Time Overshoot Jitter RMS Noise Bandwidth Arbitrary Frequency Waveform Length Amplitude Resolution Sample Rate Minimum Rise Fall Time Linearity Settling Time Jitter RMS Non volatile Memory 1 uHz to 20 MHz 1 Hz resolution lt 13ns lt 2 20 80 to 10 MHz 40 60 to 20 MHz 1 of period 5 ns 1 ns 100 ppm of period 1 Hz to 200 kHz 1 Hz resolution lt 0 1 of peak output 0 0 to 100 0 500 uHz to 5 MHz 1 Hz resolution 20 ns minimum 10 ns resolution lt 13 ns to 100 ns lt 2 300 ps 0 1 ppm of period 10 MHz typical 1 Hz to 6 MHz 1 Hz resolution 2 to 64 K points 14 bits including sign 50 MSa s 35 ns typical lt 0 1 of peak output lt 250 ns to 0 5 of final value 6 ns 30 ppm Four waveforms 336 Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Common Characteristics Amplitude Range Into 50 Q Into open circuit Accuracy at 1 kHz M 21 Units Resolution DC Offset Range peak AC DC Accuracy 1 21 Resolution Main Output Impedance Isolation Protection 10 mVpp to 10 Vpp 20 mVpp to 20 Vpp 1 of setting 1 mVpp Vpp Vrms dBm 4 digits 5 V into 50 Q 10 V into open circuit 2 of offs
101. K Modulation Carrier Waveform Shape e FSK carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform Thedefault is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform e Front Pand Operation Press any of the front pane function keys except Pulse For arbitrary waveforms press and then choose the Select Wform softkey to select the active waveform e Remotelnterface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command FSK Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 wHz 20 MHz Ramp 1 wHz 200 KHz Arbs 1 wHz 6 MHz e When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output e Front Pand Operation To set the carrier frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency e Remotelnterface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset
102. M Commands See also Pulse Width Modulation on page 93 in chapter 3 PWM Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a PWM waveform The PWM commands are listed on the next page Configure the carrier pulse waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the pulse waveform PWM is supported only for pulse Select the modulation source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source Select the modulation source using the PWM SOUR command For an external source you can skip steps 3 and 4 bdow Select the shape of the modulating waveform You can modulate the carrier with a sine square ramp noise or arbitrary waveform pulse and dc are not allowed Use the PWM INT FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape Set the modulating frequency Set the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using the PWM INT FREQ command Set the pulse width or pulse duty cycle deviation Set the Width Deviation to a value from 0 to the current Pulse Width or Period Pulse Width whichever is smaller using the PWM DEV command Or set the Duty Cycle Deviation to a value from 0 tothe current Duty Cycle or 100 Duty Cycle whichever is smaller using the PWM DEV DCYC command Enable PWM modulation After you have set up the other modulatio
103. Modulating Signal Bandwidth For narrowband FM BW 2 x Deviation Modulating Signal Bandwidth For wideband FM In the United States commercial FM stations usually have a modulation bandwidth of 15 kHz and deviation of 75 kHz making them wideband Therefore the modulated bandwidth is 2 x 75 kHz 15 kHz 180 kHz Channel spacing is 200 kHz Modulating Signal Wh Watt AY Modulated Carrier Frequency Modulation 329 Chapter 7 Tutorial Modulation Phase Modulation PM PM is very similar to FM but for PM the phase of the carrier waveform is varied rather than the frequency The variation in phase of the modulated waveform from the carrier waveform is called the phase deviation which can vary from 0 to 360 degrees Frequency Shift Keying FSK FSK issimilar toFM except the frequency alternates between two preset values The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector Frequency changes are instantaneous and phase continuous The internal modulating signal is a square waveform with 50 duty cycle You can set the internal FSK rate from 2 mHz to 100 kHz Modulating Signal Modulated Carrier Frequency Shift Keying 330 Chapter 7 Tutorial Modulation Pulse Width Modulation PWM PWM
104. N DNS Domain Name Service is an Internet service that translates Domain names into IP addresses The DNS server address is the IP address of a server that performs this service e Contact your network administrator to find out whether DNS is being used and for the correct DNS server address e Enter the address using the numeric keypad not the knob e The DNS server address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front pand operation Press viy and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup Then select DNS Server e Thereis noSCPI command to set a DNS server address 139 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration Current Configuration LAN Select the Currently Active Settings display to view the current LAN configuration information e Front pand operation Press viy and press the I O softkey Select LAN and then select Current Config e Thereis noSCPI command to display the configuration screen Note This display reflects only the settings that are currently active f you have changed any LAN settings you must first cycle the power to activate the settings then sd ect Current Config Also this display is static It does not update information for events that have occurred after theinformation is displayed For example if DHCP assigns an IP address while the display is open you
105. Not Used Returns 0 5 Loop Unlocked 32 Function generator has lost phase lock Frequency accuracy will be affected 6 Not Used 64 Not Used Returns 0 7 Not Used 128 Not Used Returns 0 8 Calibration Error 256 Error occurred during cal or cal memory lost or calibration is unsecured 9 External Reference 512 External timebase is being used 10 Not Used 1024 Not Used Returns 0 11 Not Used 2048 Not Used Returns 0 12 Not Used 4096 Not Used Returns 0 13 Not Used 8192 Not Used Returns 0 14 Not Used 16384 Not Used Returns 0 15 Not Used 32768 Not Used Returns 0 256 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Questionable Data event register is cleared when e You execute the cLs clear status command You query the event register using the STAT QUES EVEN command The Questionable Data enable register is cleared when e You turn on the power the PSc command does not apply e You execute the STAT PRES command e You execute the STAT QUES ENAB 0 command 257 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Standard Event Register The Standard Event register group reports the following types of events power on detected command syntax errors command execution errors self test or calibration errors query errors or the OPc command has been executed Any or all of these conditions ca
106. OLD command 186 TRANsition command 189 WIDTh command 187 RAMP SYMMetry 181 SYMMetry 181 command command SQUare DCY Cle command 180 DCY Cle command 180 USER command 233 function allowed with modulation 55 amplitude limitations 56 frequency limitations 56 modulation modes allowed 172 pulse period limitations 186 FUNCtion command 172 FUNCtion USER command 234 FUNCtion command 172 G gate polarity burst 223 225 gated burst 107 334 gated burst mode 216 gateway address 138 gaussian noise 170 GPIB address 48 135 136 configuration 48 connector 6 default address 48 front panel configuration 48 setting address 48 GPIB configuration 48 135 graph mode 25 ground loops 323 H handle changing positions 16 removing 29 harmonic distortion 336 header binary block 231 heart waveform 228 help system 27 language selection 28 high impedance load 63 high level 178 setting 21 high Z load 35 63 hop frequency 38 hop frequency FSK 91 202 host name 138 ID string 243 EEE 488 address 48 135 binary block format 231 connector 6 default address 48 front panel configuration 48 service request 254 setting address 48 immediate trigger 213 221 224 impedance load 35 imperfections signal 320 instrument calibration commands 264 error messages 298 reading count 265 securing 264 storing text message 265 instrument errors 129 242 instrument ID string 243 instrument overview 2 instrument reset
107. Remote Interface Operation VOLTage lt amplitude gt MINimum MAXimum Or you can set the amplitude by specifying a high level and low level using the following commands VOLTage HIGH lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage LOW lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command DC Offset Voltage The default offset is O volts for all functions Limits Dueto Amplitude The relationship between offset voltage and output amplitude is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50 load or 10 volts for a high impedance load Voffset lt Vmax pe If the specified offset voltage is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum dc voltage allowed with the amplitude specified Limits Dueto Output Termination The offset limits are determined by the current output termination setting For example if you set the offset to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the offset voltage displayed on the function generator s front panel will doubleto 200 mV dc and no error will be generated If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed offset will drop in half See Output Termination on page 63 for moreinformation 60 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration
108. S Anti Aliasing 50 MHz Filter Address Data gt Pa E Waveform DAC Direct Digital Synthesis Circuitry The 33220A uses two anti aliasing filters An elliptical filter is used for continuous sine waves because of its nearly flat passband and sharp cutoff above 20 MHz Since elliptical filters exhibit severe ringing for waveforms other than continuous sine waves a linear phase filter is used for all other waveform functions For standard waveforms and arbitrary waveforms that are defined with fewer than 16 384 16K points the function generator uses waveform memory that is 16K words deep For arbitrary waveforms that are defined with more than 16K points the function generator uses waveform memory that is 65 536 64K words deep 313 Chapter 7 Tutorial Direct Digital Synthesis The 33220A represents amplitude values by 16 384 discrete voltage levels or 14 bit vertical resolution The specified waveform data is divided into samples such that one waveform cycle exactly fills waveform memory see the illustration below for a sine wave If you create an arbitrary waveform that does not contain exactly 16K or 64K points the waveform is automatically stretched by repeating points or by interpolating between existing points as needed to fill waveform memory Since all of waveform memory is filled with one waveform cycle each memory location corresponds to a phase angle of 2r 16 384 radians or 2n 65 536 radians 8191
109. Signals on page 325 e Modulation on page 327 e Frequency Sweep on page 332 e Burst on page 333 You can usean arbitrary waveform generator in a variety of applications where it might be otherwise difficult or impossible to generate complex output waveforms With an arbitrary waveform generator signal imperfections such as rise time ringing glitches noise and random timing variations can be easily simulated in a controlled manner Physics chemistry biomedicine electronics mechanics and other fields can benefit from the versatility of an arbitrary waveform generator Wherever things vibrate pump pulse bubble burst or change with timein any way there are possible applications limited only by your ability to specify the waveform data 312 Chapter 7 Tutorial Direct Digital Synthesis Direct Digital Synthesis The Agilent 33220A uses a signal generation technique called Direct Digital Synthesis DDS for all waveform functions except pulse As shown below a stream of digital data representing the desired waveform is sequentially read from waveform memory and is applied to the input of a digital to analog converter DAC The DAC is clocked at the function generator s sampling frequency of 50 MHz and outputs a series of voltage steps approximating the desired waveform A low pass anti aliasing filter then smooths the voltage steps to create the final waveform Waveform nf Memory N
110. Sine Square Ramp Pulse Noise DC Arb AM FM PM FSK e e Carrier PWM Carrier Sweep Mode Burst Mode e 1 Allowed in the External Gated burst mode only 55 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Function Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum frequency is less than that of the current function the frequency is adjusted to the maximum value for the new function For example if you are currently outputting a 20 MHz sine wave and then change to the ramp function the function generator will automatically adjust the output frequency to 200 kHz the upper limit for ramps Amplitude Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum amplitude is less than that of the current function the amplitude is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new function This may occur when the output units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine in Vrms Front Pand Operation To select a function press any key in the top row of function keys Press Ab currently selected To view the other arbitrary waveform choices press the Select Wform softkey DC On softkey P
111. T4 ARB e Use the DATA DEL command to delete any of the user defined waveforms in non volatile memory DATA NVOLatile FREE Query the number of non volatile memory slots available to store user defined waveforms Returns the number of memory slots available to store user defined waveforms Returns 0 memory is full 1 2 3 or 4 235 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA DELete lt arb name gt Delete the specified arbitrary waveform from memory You can delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory e You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output If you attempt to delete this waveform a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated e You cannot delete any of the five built in arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to delete one of these waveforms a Not able to delete a built in arb waveform error is generated e Usethe DATA DEL ALL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory and all user defined non volatile waveforms all at once If one of the waveforms is currently being output a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated DATA DELete ALL Delete all user defined arbitrary waveforms from memory This command deletes the waveform in volatile memory and all user defined
112. TPut TRIGger OFF ON OUTPut TRIGger Disable or enable the trigger out signal When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge OUTP TRIG SLOP command is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep The default is OFF The TRIG query returns O OFF or 1 ON 214 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands MARKer FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum MARKer FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the marker frequency This is the frequency at which the signal on the front panel Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep The Sync signal always goes from low to high at the beginning of the sweep Select from 1 wHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 500 Hz MIN the start or stop frequency whichever is lower MAX thestart frequency or stop frequency whichever is higher The FREQ query returns the marker frequency in hertz e When sweep is enabled the marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency If you attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency not in this range the function generator will automatically set the marker frequency equal to the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is closer From the renoteinterface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the marker frequency will be adjusted as
113. TRIGger SLOPe BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted External Gated Burst BURSt GATE POLarity OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig Out Connector TRIGger SLOPe TRIGger OFF ON TRIGger State Storage Commands see page 238 for more information SaAV 0 1 2 3 4 State 0 is theinstrument state at power down RCL 0 1 2 3 4 States 1 through 4 are user defined states MEMory STATe NAME 0 1 NAME 0 DELete 0 Hh RECall AUTO VALid 0 1 2 3 4 MEMory NSTates Parameters shown in bold are sd eted following a RST reset command 157 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary System Related Commands see page 242 for more information SYSTem ERRor IDN DISPlay OFF oNn DISPlay DISPlay TEXT lt quoted string gt TEXT TEXT CLEar RST TST SYSTem VERSion SYSTem BEEPer BEEPer STATe OFF ON BEEPer STATe SYSTem KLOCk STATe OFF ON KLOCk EXCLude NONE LOCal KLOCK EXCLude SYSTem SECurity IMMediate Caution Clears all memory Not recom mended for routine applications LRN OPC OPC WAI Interface Configuration Commands see page 247 for moreinformation SYSTem COMMunicate RLSTate LOCal REMote RWLock Parameters shown in bold aresedected following a RST reset command 158 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Phase
114. TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion PM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum PM DEViation lt deviation in degress gt MINimum MAXimum PM DEViation MINimum MAXimum PM SOURce INTernal EXTernal PM SOURce PM STATe OFF ON PM STATe FSKey FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FSKey FREQuency MINimum MAXimum FSkKey INTernal RATE lt ratein Hz gt MINimum MAXimum FSKey INTernal RATE MINimum MAXimum FSKey SOURce INTernal EXTernal FSKey SOURce FSKey STATe OFF ON FSKey STATe PWM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion PWM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation lt deviation in seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation DCYCle lt deviation in percent gt MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation DCYCle MINimum MAXimum PWM SOURce INTernal EXTernal PWM SOURce PWM STATe OFF ON PWM STATe Parameters shown in bold are sedected following a RST reset command 153 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Sweep Commands see page 210 for moreinformation FREQuency STARt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum STARt MINimum MAXimum STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum STOP MINimum MAXimum FREQuency CENTer lt frequency gt MINimum MAXi
115. The rear panel Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the burst e When the Bus software trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR BUS command the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 us pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each burst OUTPut TRIGger OFF ON OUTPut TRIGger Disable or enable the trigger out signal used with burst and sweep only When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge OUTP TRIG SLOP command is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst The default is OFF The TRIG query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON 223 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Triggering Commands Triggering Commands Applies to Sweep and Burst only See also Triggering starting on page 115 in chapter 3 TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS TRIGger SOURce Select the source from which the function generator will accept a trigger The function generator will accept an immediate internal trigger a hardware trigger from the rear panel Trig In connector or a software bus trigger The default is IMM The SOUR query returns IMM EXT or BUS e When the Immediate internal source is selected the function generator outputs continuously when the sweep mode or burst mode is enabled e When th
116. WIDTh DcyCle HOLD WIDTh DCyCle WIDTh lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 50 to 50 Thresholds WIDTh MINimum MAXimum DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum DCYCle MINimum MAXimum TRANSition lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 10 to 90 Thresholds TRANsSition MINimum MAXimum Parameters shown in bold are sd eted following a RST reset command 151 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Modulation Commands see page 190 for moreinformation AM Commands aM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum AM DEPTh lt depth in percent gt MINimum MAXimum AM DEPTh MINimum MAXimum AM SOURce INTernal EXTernal AM SOURce AM STATe OFF ON AM STATe FM Commands FM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion FM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum FM DEViation lt peak deviation in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum FM DEViation MINimum MAXimum FM SOURce INTernal EXTernal FM SOURce FM STATe OFF ON FM STATe Parameters shown in bold aresedected following a RST reset command 152 PM Commands FSK Commands PWM Commands Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary PM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp
117. You can configure the function generator to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles called a burst You can use burst in one of two modes N Cycle Burst also called triggered burst or Gated Burst 333 Chapter 7 Tutorial Burst N Cycle Burst An N Cycle burst consists of a specific number of waveform cycles 1 to 50 000 and is always initiated by a trigger event You can also set the burst count to Infinite which results in a continuous waveform once the function generator is triggered Sync Output IHi Main Output Three Cycle Burst Waveform For bursts the trigger source can be an external signal an internal timer the key or acommand received from the remote interface The input for external trigger signals is the rear panel Trig In connector This connector accepts TTL compatible levels and is referenced to chassis ground not floating ground When not used as an input the Trig In connector can be configured as an output to enable the 33220A to trigger other instruments at the same time as its internal trigger occurs An N Cycle burst always begins and ends at the same point in the waveform called the start phase A starting phase of 0 corresponds to the beginning of the waveform record and 360 corresponds to the end of the waveform record Gated Burst n the Gated burst mode the output waveform is either on or off based on the level of the external
118. ace Configuration on page 135 in chapter 3 SYSTem COMMunicate RLSTate LOCal REMote RWLock Set the remote local state of the function generator over the LAN interface from a Telnet or socket session Provides control analogous to the EEE 488 2 commands such as GTL GoTo Local over the GPIB and USB interfaces e LOCal The default Sets the instrument state to local Removes any annunciator and unlocks the front panel keyboard e REMote Sets the instrument state to remote Displays the remote 247 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only The rear panel 10 MHz In and 10 MHz Out connectors present only if Option 001 is installed allow synchronization between multiple Agilent 33220A function generators see connection diagram below or to an external 10 MHz clock signal You can also control the phase offset from the front pane or over the remote interface Note You can use the phase lock commands described below to synchronize multiple 33220A instruments only if all of these instruments have Option 001 External Timebase Reference installed This option provides the 10 MHz Out and 10 MHz In back pand connectors and the circuitry required to synchronize the instruments PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum PHASe MINimum MAXimum Adjust the phase offset of the output waveform in degrees or radians as specified by the
119. ack mounted beside the Agilent 33220A Note Renovethecarrying handle and thefront and rear rubber bumpers before rack mounting the instrument To remove the handle rotate it to vertical and pull the ends outward Front Rear bottom view To remove the rubber bumper stretch a corner and then slide it off 29 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Rack Mount the Function Generator To rack mount two instruments side by side order lock link kit 5061 9694 and flange kit 5063 9212 Be sure to use the support rails in the rack cabinet Note The lock link kit works only for instruments of equal depth If you want to mount an Agilent 33220A and an instrument of a different depth for example an Agilent 33250A contact your Agilent Representative for further information In order to prevent overheating do not block the flow of air into or out of the instrument Be sure to allow enough clearance at the rear sides and bottom of the instrument to permit adequate internal air flow 30 Front Panel Menu Operation Front Panel Menu Operation This chapter introduces you to the front panel keys and menu operation This chapter does not give a detailed description of every front panel key or menu operation It does however give you an overview of the front panel menus and many front panel operations See chapter 3 Features and Functions starting on page 53 for a complete discussion of the function generato
120. ailable from the front pand only e The bulb saver setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset When shipped from the factory the bulb saver mode is enabled e Front Pane Operation Press Wy and then select the Sern Svr screen saver softkey from the System menu 130 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Display Contrast To optimize the readability of the front panel display you can adjust the contrast setting This featureis available from the front pand only e Display contrast 15 to 50 The default is 30 e The contrast setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front Paned Operation Press utility softkey from the System menu and then select the Display Contr Self Test e A power on self test occurs automatically when you turn on the function generator This limited test assures you that the function generator is operational e A compledeself test runs a series of tests and takes approximately 15 seconds to execute If all tests pass you can have high confidence that the function generator is fully operational e Ifthe complete self test is successful Self Test Passed is displayed on the front panel If the self test fails Self Test Failed is displayed and an error number is shown See the Agilent 33
121. ain processor U101 and the synthesis IC U501 has failed or that the synthesis IC itself has failed Self test failed pulse phase locked loop This error indicates that a phase locked loop in the pulse waveform synthesizer is not correctly locking and that the frequency of pulse waveforms only may not be correct Indicates a failure of the synthesis IC U501 or associated circuitry 619 Self test failed leading edge DAC 620 Self test failed trailing edge DAC 621 Self test failed square wave threshold DAC 623 Self test failed dc offset DAC 624 Self test failed null DAC 625 Self test failed amplitude DAC These errors indicate a malfunctioning system DAC U801 failed DAC multiplexer U 803 channels or associated circuitry 296 622 626 to 629 630 631 632 Chapter 5 Error Messages Self Test Errors Self test failed time base calibration DAC This error indicates that the time base calibration DAC in the synthesis IC U501 or voltage controlled oscillator U602 has failed 626 Self test failed waveform filter path select relay 627 Self test failed 10 dB attenuator path 628 Self test failed 20 dB attenuator path 629 Self test failed 20 dB amplifier path These errors indicate that the specified relay is not being properly switched or the attenuator amplifier is not providing the expected attenuation or gain These self tests use the internal ADC to verify that the output path r
122. al time of one edge as shown below Pulse Width gt 1 6 X EdgeTime e Front Pane Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Width softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse width e Remote nterface Operation FUNCtion PULSe WIDTh lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 71 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Waveforms Pulse Duty Cycle The pulse duty cycle is defined as Duty Cycle 100 X Pulse Width Period where the pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge e Pulse duty cycle 0 to 100 see restrictions below The default is 10 e The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following restrictions determined by the minimum pulse width Wmin The function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period Duty Cycle gt 100 X Wmin Period and Duty Cycle lt 100 X 1 Wmin Period where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10s but lt 100s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s e The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following restriction determined by the edgetime The function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period Duty Cycle gt 100 X 1 6 X Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle lt 10
123. an internal or external modulation source for FM e Modulating source Internal or External The default is Internal e If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The frequency deviation is controlled by the V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 100 kHz then a 5V signal level corresponds toa 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency Modulation In 5 V OV e Front Pand Operation After enabling FM press the Source softkey e Remotelnterface Operation FM SOURce INTernal EXTernal 84 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Phase Modulation PM Phase Modulation PM A modulated waveform consists of a carrier waveform and a modulating waveform PM is very similar to FM but in PM the phase of the modulated waveform is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform For moreinformation on the fundamentals of Phase Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select PM Modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PM and AM at the same time When you enable PM the previous modulation mode is turned off The function generator will not allow PM to be enabled at the sa
124. and For an external source you can skip steps 3 and 4 bdow Select the shape of the modulating waveform You can modulate the carrier with a sine square ramp noise or arbitrary waveform pulse and dc are not allowed Use the PM INT FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape Set the modulating frequency Set the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using the PM INT FREQ command Set the phase deviation Set the phase deviation to any value from 0 to 360 degrees using the PM DEV command Enable PM modulation After you have set up the other modulation parameters use the PM STAT ON command to enable PM 197 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Modulation PM Commands PM Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform PM SOURce INTernal EXTernal PM SOURCe Select the source of the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT e If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The phase deviation is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the phase deviation to 180 degrees using the PM DEV command then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degr
125. angular sampling function You can reduce leakage errors by adjusting the window length to include an integer number of cycles or by including more cycles within the window to reduce the residual end point discontinuity size Some signals are composed of discrete non harmonically related frequencies Since these signals are non repetitive all frequency components cannot be harmonically related to the window length You should be careful in these situations to minimize end point discontinuities and spectral leakage 0 90 180 270 360 0 90 180 270 360 x 1 Cycle Arbitrary Waveform with Discontinuity 317 Chapter 7 Tutorial Square Waveform Generation Spectrum of Above Waveform at 100 kHz Square Waveform Generation To eliminate distortion due to aliasing at higher frequencies the 33220A uses a different waveform generation technique to create square waves Square waveforms are created by routing a DDS generated sine wave into a comparator The digital output from the comparator is then used as the basis for the square wave output The duty cycle of the waveform can be varied by changing the comparator s threshold Waveform Anti Aliasing DAC Filter Comparator Threshold Voltage DAC Square Waveform Generation Circuitry 318 Chapter 7 Tutorial Pulse Waveform Generation Pulse Waveform Generation To eliminate distortion due to a
126. apter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Data out of range duty cycle value clipped to The square wave duty cycle is limited to values between 20 and 80 by instrument hardware Data out of range duty cycle limited by frequency value clipped to upper limit The square wave duty cycle is limited to values between 40 and 60 when the frequency is greater than 10 MHz Duty Cycle 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz Illegal parameter value An exact parameter value from a list of possible values was expected 292 313 314 315 350 Chapter 5 Error Messages Device Dependent Errors Device Dependent Errors Calibration memory lost memory corruption detected The non volatile memory used to store the function generator s calibration constants has detected a checksum error This error may be the result of a device failure or extreme conditions such as lightning or strong magnetic fields Save recall memory lost memory corruption detected The non volatile memory used to store instrument states has detected a checksum error This error may be the result of a device failure or extreme conditions such as lightning or strong magnetic fields Configuration memory lost memory corruption detected The non volatile memory used to store the function generator s configuration settings i e remote interface settings has detected a checksum error This error may be the
127. are the instrument for use and help you get familiar with some of its front panel operations This chapter is divided into the following sections e ToPrepare the Function Generator for Use on page 15 e ToAdjust the Carrying Handle on page 16 e ToSet the Output Frequency on page 17 e ToSet the Output Amplitude on page 18 e ToSet aDC Offset Voltage on page 20 e ToSet the High Level and Low Level Values on page 21 e ToSelect DC Volts on page 22 e ToSet the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave on page 23 e ToConfigure a Pulse Waveform on page 24 e ToView a Waveform Graph on page 25 e ToOutput a Stored Arbitrary Waveform on page 26 e ToUsethe Built In Help System on page 27 e ToRack Mount the Function Generator on page 29 14 1 a gt Power 2 VS Switch Chapter 1 Quick Start To Prepare the Function Generator for Use To Prepare the Function Generator for Use Check the list of supplied items Verify that you have received the following items with your instrument If anything is missing please contact your nearest Agilent Sales Office Q One power cord This User s Guide One Service Guide One folded Quick Start Tutorial One folded Quick Reference Guide Certificate of Calibration Connectivity software on CD ROM One USB 2 0 cable CoovovovD dD Connect the power cord and turn on the function generator The instrument runs a short power on self test which takes a few seconds When the i
128. arrier waveform e Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation e Front Paned Operation After enabling AM press the Shape softkey e Remotelnterface Operation AM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Modulating Waveform F requency The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for AM e Modulating frequency internal source 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 100 Hz e Front Pand Operation After enabling AM press the AM Freq softkey e Remotelnterface Operation AM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 76 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Modulation Depth The modulation depth is expressed as a percentage and represents the extent of the amplitude variation At 0 depth the output amplitude is half of the selected value At 100 depth the output amplitude equals the selected value e Modulation depth 0 to 120 The default is 100 e Note that even at greater than 100 depth the function generator will not exceed 5V peak on the output into a 500 load If you select the External modulating source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For e
129. as shown bdow The function generator will adjust the pulse edge time and then the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period From the renoteinterface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the pulse width will be adjusted as described Pulse Width lt Period Wmin e The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between the period and the edgetimeas shown below The function generator will limit the pulse edge time first and then the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the pulse width will be limited as described Pulse Width lt Period 1 6 X Edge Time e The pulse width must also be greater than the total time of one edge as shown below Pulse Width gt 1 6 X EdgeTime Note This function is affected by the FUNC PULS HOLD command which determines the valueto be hdd constant as the period is adjusted the specified pulse width value or thespecified pulse duty cycle value See the FUNC PULS HOLD command for further information 187 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle MINimum MAXimum Set the pulse duty cyclein percent The the pulse duty cycleis defined as Duty Cycle 100 X Pulse Width Period where the pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold
130. ating waveform for AM or FM the symmetry setting does not apply OUTPut OFF ON OUTPut Disable or enable the front panel Output connector The default is OFF When the output is enabled the key is illuminated on the function generator s front panel The oUTP query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The APPLy command overrides the current OUTP command setting and automatically enables the Output connector ON e If an excessive external voltage is applied to the front panel Output connector an error message will be displayed and the output will be disabled To re enable the output remove the overload from the Output connector and send the OUTP ON command TheouTPut OFF ON command changes the state of the output connector by switching the output relay However this command does not zero the voltage to be output before switching the relay Thus the output signal may have glitches for about a millisecond until the signal stabilizes You can minimize these glitches by first setting the amplitude 181 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands to the minimum using the voLTage command and the offset to zero using the VOLTage OFFSet commana before changing the output state OUTPut LOAD lt ohms gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum OUTPut LOAD MINimum MAXimum Select the desired output termination i e the impedance of the load attached to the output of the Agilent
131. ation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off Settings conflict FM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off Settings conflict AM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off Settings conflict PM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off Settings conflict PWM turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off Settings conflict sweep turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time W
132. ator as ASCII data Data values a Private Dim Dim Set Set Set Dim Dim Dim ReDi On E 1 1 Kri rein the range 1 to Sub cmdASCIIArb Click io_mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedI0488 io_mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Fgen New VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Fgen IO io_mgr Open txtIO Text Waveform As String I As Integer DataStr As String m Waveform 1 To 4000 rror GoTo MyError se time and fall time The waveform With Fgen End raQO txtE txtE Data For Next 1 For I Next I For Next 1 For I Next I WriteString RST 10 Clear 10 Timeout 40000 With mpute waveform rror Text rror SelText Computing Waveform AL Tog Waveform I Str I 1 5 6 To 205 Waveform I 1 206 To 210 Waveform I Str 210 I 5 211 To 4000 Waveform I 0 Str Join Waveform Continued amp vbCrLf This program uses the arbitrary waveform function to download and output a square wave pulse with a calculated consists of 4000 points downloaded to the function generator as ASCII data Reset the function generator Clear errors and status registers Set timeout to 40 seconds for long download strings Set rise time 5 points Set pulse width 200 points Set fall time 5 points Set remaining points to zero Create string from data array
133. b to select each character e Usethecursor key to move to the next character e You can usethe keypad for numbers e Usethe key to delete all characters tothe right starting at the cursor position The host name is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front pand operation Press witty and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup Then select Host Name There is no SCPI command to set a host name 138 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration Domain Name LAN A domain name is a registered name on the Internet which is translated into an IP address e Contact your network administrator for the correct domain name e Enter the domain name using the knob and cursor keys Each character in the name can be a letter a through z number dash _ or period e Usethe knob to select each character e Usethecursor key to move to the next character e You can usethe keypad for numbers e Usethe key to delete all characters to the right starting at the cursor position e Thehost name is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front pand operation Press vuy and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by DNS Setup Then select Domain Name e Thereis noSCPI command to set a domain name DNS Server LA
134. been set to the maximum N Cycle value 50 000 cycles Settings conflict infinite burst changed trigger source to BUS An infinite count burst is allowed only when the external or bus software trigger source is selected Sending the BURS NCYC INF command has automatically changed the trigger source from immediate to bus Settings conflict burst period increased to fit entire burst The number of cycles specified by the BURS NCYC command takes priority over the burst period as long as the burst period is not at its maximum value The function generator has increased the burst period to accommodate the specified burst count or waveform frequency Settings conflict burst count reduced to fit entire burst Since the burst period is currently at its maximum the function generator has reduced the burst count to allow the specified waveform frequency 278 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict triggered burst not available for noise You cannot use the noise function in the triggered burst mode Noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode Settings conflict amplitude units changed to Vpp due to high Z load The output units VOLT UNIT command cannot be set to dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance OUTP LOAD command The function generator has converted the units to Vpp Settings conflict trigger output disabled by
135. commands used to program the function generator to output a pulse waveform To select the pulse function use the FUNC PULS command see page 172 Refer to the diagram below for the command descriptions that follow 90 90 50 50 we _ Pulse Width 10 10 heh oe Rise Time Fall Time Period PULSe PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PULSe PERiod MINimum MAXimum Set the period for pulses Select a period from 200 ns to 2000 seconds The default is 1 ms MIN 200 ns MAX 2000 seconds The PULS PER query returns the period of the pulse waveform in seconds e The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width and the edgetime The function generator will adjust the edge time and the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period From theremoteinterface a Settings conflict error will begenerated The edge timeis minimized first and then the width or duty cycle is adjusted as shown bdow Period gt PulseWidth 1 6 X Edge Time or in terms of pulse duty cycle Period gt Period X Duty Cycle 100 1 6 X Edge Time 185 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands e This command affects the period and frequency for all waveform functions not just pulse F or example if you select a period using the PULS PER command and then change the function to sine wave the specified period will be used for the new function
136. controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the duty cycle deviation to 5 percent a 5V signal level corresponds to a 5 percent deviation that is an additional 5 of period added to the pulse duty cycle Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the duty cycle Note The operation of the PWM DEV DCYC command is affected by the FUNC PULS HOLD command see Pulse Configuration Commands on page 185 for further information The FUNC PULS HOLD command determines whether pulse width the default or pulse duty cycle values areto be hdd constant as the period is varied If the width is hed so is thewidth deviation If theduty cycleis hdd sois theduty cycle deviation If pulsewidth and width deviation are being hdd duty cycle deviation values specified with the PWM DEV DCYC command are automatically converted to the equivalent width deviation in seconds PWM STATe OFF ON PWM STATe Disable or enable PWM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable PWM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PWM and AM at the same time When you enable PWM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generat
137. d by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector For this example you will set the carrier frequency to 3 KHz and the hop frequency to 500 Hz with an FSK rateof 100 Hz r a 1 Select the function frequency and amplitude of the carrier Press Sime and then press the Freq Ampl and Offset softkeys to configure the carrier waveform For this example sdect a 3 kHz sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp 2 Select FSK Mod and then select FSK using the Type softkey Notice that a status message F SK is shown in the upper left corner of the display 38 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output an FSK Waveform 3 Set the hop frequency Press the Hop Freq softkey and then set the value to 500 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys 4 Set the FSK shift rate Press the FSK Rate softkey and then set the value to 100 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys At this point the function generator outputs an FSK waveform if the output is enabled 5 View the waveform 39 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a PWM Waveform To Output a PWM Waveform You can configure the function generator to output a pulse width modulated PWM waveform The Agilent 33220A provides PWM for pulse carrier waveforms and PWM is the only type of modulation supported for pul
138. d on the pulse duty cycle is held and the duty cycle deviation also is held as the period is varied Width deviation commands are converted to duty cycle deviation values Note The FUNC PULS HOLD command does not limit period settings The pulse width or duty cycle are adjusted if necessary to accommodate a new period setting This command will cause the Width Dty Cyc softkey in the pulse menu to toggle its sense when appropriate Also changing the Width Dty Cyc softkey from the front pana will changetheHoLD selection for subsequent programmatic behavior 186 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Configuration Commands FUNCtion PULSe WIDTh lt Seconds gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion PULSe WIDTh MINimum MAXimum Set the pulse width in seconds The pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge You can vary the pulse width from 20 ns to 2000 seconds see restrictions be ow The default pulse width is 100 us MIN 20 ns MAX 1999 99 seconds The WIDT query returns the pulse width in seconds e Theminimum pulse width Wmin is affected by the period Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10 s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10s but lt 100s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s e The specified pulse width must also be less than the difference between the period and the minimum pulse width
139. dc voltage function using the FUNC Dc command and then set the offset voltage level using the VOLT OFFS command You can set the dc level to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into an open circuit 176 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands VOLTage OFFSet lt offsd gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage OFFSet MINimum MAXimum Set the dc offset voltage The default offset is O volts for all functions MIN selects the most negative dc offset voltage for the selected function and amplitude MAX selects the largest dc offset for the selected function and amplitude The oFFs query returns the offset voltage for the function currently selected e Limits Dueto Amplitude The output amplitude and offset are related to Vmax as shown below Voffset Vpp 2 lt Vmax where Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load The new offset specified in the VOLT OFFS command will be set but the amplitude may be reduced accordingly and a Settings conflict error generated e Limits Dueto Output Termination The offset limits are determined by the current output termination setting For example if you set the offset to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the offset voltage displayed on the function generator s front panel will doubleto 200 mV dc and no error wil
140. den by enabling the marker used with the sweep mode see page 68 Therefore when the marker is enabled and the sweep mode is also enabled the Sync setting is ignored Front Pand Operation After enabling sweeps press the Marker softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired marker frequency Remote nterface Operation MARKer FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum MARKer Off On 103 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Sweep Trigger Source In the sweep mode the function generator outputs a single sweep when a trigger signal is received After one sweep from the start frequency tothe stop frequency the function generator waits for the next trigger while outputting the start frequency e Sweep trigger source Internal External or Manual The default is Internal e When the Internal immediate source is selected the function generator outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time specified e When the External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardwaretrigger applied tothe rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the specified polarity e Thetrigger period must be greater than or equal to the specified sweep time plus 1 ms e When the Manual source is selected the function generator outputs one sweep each time the front panel key is pressed e F
141. described MARKer OFF ON MARKer Disable or enable the frequency marker When the frequency marker is disabled the signal output from the Sync connector is the normal Sync signal for the carrier waveform see Sync Output Signal on page 68 The default is OFF The MARK query returns 0 OFF or I ON e The ouTP SYNC command is overridden by the setting of the MARK command Therefore when the marker frequency is enabled and the sweep mode is also enabled the OUTP SYNC command is ignored 215 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands Burst Mode Commands Seealso Burst Mode starting on page 106 in chapter 3 Burst Mode Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a burst You can use burst in one of two modes as described below The function generator enables one burst mode at a time e Triggered Burst Mode In this mode default the function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received After the specified number of cycles have been output the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger You can configure the function generator to use an internal trigger to initiate the burst or you can provide an external trigger by pressing the front panel key by applying a trigger signal to the rear panel Trig In connector or by sending a software trigger command from the remote int
142. down in frequency set the start frequency gt stop frequency e For sweeps with Marker Off the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal isa TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the midpoint of the sweep The frequency of the sync waveform is equal to the specified sweep time The signal is output from the front panel Sync connector e For sweeps with Marker On the Sync signal isa TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency The signal is output from the front panel Sync connector e Front Pand Operation After enabling sweeps press the Start or Stop softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency e Remotelnterface Operation FREQuency STARt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 100 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Center Frequency and Frequency Span If desired you can set the frequency boundaries of the sweep using a center frequency and frequency span These parameters are similar to the start frequency and stop frequency s the previous page and are included to give you added flexibility Center frequency 1 uHzto20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 550 Hz Frequency span 0 Hz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default
143. dulating frequency 199 modulating source 88 198 modulating waveform 87 modulation 85 modulation waveshape 198 overview 197 phase deviation 88 199 SOU Rce command 198 STATe command 199 PM commands 198 point interpolation 122 polarity 67 polarity trigger 214 222 225 polarity waveform 67 positive trigger slope 214 222 225 power connector 6 power cord 15 power switch 15 power down recall 126 241 product dimensions 340 product overview 2 product specifications 335 programming commands 147 programming examples 301 programming overview 161 PULSe PERiod command 185 pulse command front panel configuration 24 pulse duty cycle definition 188 pulse edge time 73 pulse period 185 function limitations 186 pulse waveform edge time 189 pulse period 70 tutorial description 318 pulse width 24 71 72 187 definition 185 187 pulse width modulation 93 duty cycle deviation 97 206 modulating frequency 205 modulating source 98 204 modulating waveform 95 modulation waveshape 204 overview 203 pulse waveform 94 width deviation 96 205 PWM 93 DE Viation DCY Cle command 206 DE Viation command 205 duty cycle deviation 97 206 INTernal FREQuency command 205 FUNCtion 204 modulating frequency 205 modulating source 98 204 modulating waveform 95 modulation source 98 modulation waveshape 204 overview 203 pulse waveform 94 SOU Rce command 204 command STATe command 207 width deviation 96 205 PWM commands 204 Q quant
144. duty cycle expressed as a percentage of the period The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source For moreinformation on the fundamentals of Pulse Width Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select PWM Modulation The function generator only allows PWM to be selected for a pulse waveform and PWM is the only modulation type supported for pulse The function generator will not allow PWM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled Front Pand Operation You must enable PWM before setting up any modulation type supported for pulse The PWM waveform is output using the present settings for the pulse frequency modulating frequency output amplitude offset voltage pulse width and edge time Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable PWM after you have set up the other modulation parameters PWM STATe OFF ON 93 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Pulse Waveform e Pulseis the only waveform shape supported for PWM e Front Pane Operation Press Puss e Remotelnterface Operation FUNCtion PULSe You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Pulse Period The range for the pulse period is 200 ns to 2000 s The default is 1 ms e Front Pane Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Freq softkey again
145. e To Configure the Remote Interface The Agilent 33220A supports remote interface communication using a choice of three interfaces GPIB USB and LAN All three interfaces are live at power up The instructions that follow tell how to configure your remote interface from the instrument front panel Note TheCD ROM provided with your instrument contains connectivity software to enable communications over theseinterfaces Refer to the instructions provided on the CD ROM toinstall this softwareon your PC GPIB Configuration You need only select a GPIB address Select the I O menu DONE Select the GPIB address Use the knob and cursor keys or the numeric keypad to select a GPIB address in the range 0 through 30 the factory default is 10 TheGPIB address is shown on thefront pand display at power on Exit the menu Press the DONE softkey USB Configuration The USB interface requires no front panel configuration parameters J ust connect the Agilent 33220A to your PC with the appropriate USB cable The interface will self configure Press the Show USB Id softkey in the I O menu to see the USB interface identification string Both USB 1 1 and USB 2 0 are supported 48 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Configure the Remote Interface LAN Configuration There are several parameters that you may need to set to establish network communication using the LAN interface Primarily you will ne
146. e MINimum MAXimum or DEF ault in place of a specific value for the frequency parameter MIN selects the lowest frequency allowed for the function specified and MAX selects the highest frequency allowed The default frequency is 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 wHz 20 MHz Ramp 1 wHz 200 kHz Pulse 500 wHz 5 MHz Noise DC Not Applicable Not Applicable Arbs 1 uHz 6 MHz e Limits Dueto Function The frequency limits are determined by the function specified in the APPLy command The APPLy command always sets both the function and the frequency and the specified frequency must be appropriate for the function For example the command APPL RAMP 20 MHz results in a Data out of range error The frequency is set to 200 kHz which is the maximum for a ramp waveform 164 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command Output Amplitude For the amplitude parameter of the APPLy command the output amplitude range depends on the function specified and the output termination You can substitute MINimum MAXimum or DEF ault in place of a specific value for the amplitude parameter MIN selects the smallest amplitude 10 mVpp into 50 ohms MAX selects the largest amplitude for the function specified at most 10 Vpp into 50 ohms depending on function and offset voltage The default amplitudeis 100 mVpp
147. e manual selection softkeys appear and the current IP address is displayed 169 254 2 20 DONE Contact your network administrator for the IP address to use All IP addresses take the dot notati on form nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn in each case is a byte value in the range 0 through 255 You can enter a new IP address using the numeric keypad not the knob J ust type in the numbers and the period delimiters using the keypad Use the left cursor key as a backspace key Do not enter leading zeros F or further information see More about P Addresses and Dot Notation at the end of this section b Set the Subnet Mask The subnet mask is required if your network has been divided into subnets Ask your network administrator whether a subnet mask is needed and for the correct mask Press the Subnet Mask softkey and enter the subnet mask in the IP address format using the keypad 255 255 0 0 Sub It ask b ay DONE c Set the Default Gateway The gateway address is the address of a gateway which is a device that connects two networks Ask your network administrator whether a gateway is in use and for the correct address Press the Default Gateway softkey and enter the gateway address in the IP address format using the keypad d Exit the IP Setup menu Press DONE to return tothe LAN menu 50 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Configure the Remote Interface 4 Configure the DNS Set
148. e specified period Period gt PulseWidth 1 6 X Edge Time e Front Pand Operation After selecting the pulse function press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse period e Remotelnterface Operation PULSe PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 70 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Waveforms Pulse Width The pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge of the pulse to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge e Pulse width 20 ns to 2000 s see restrictions below Thedefault pulse width is 100 us e Theminimum pulse width Wmin is affected by the period Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10 s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s e The specified pulse width must also be less than the difference between the period and the minimum pulse width as shown bdow The function generator will adjust the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period Pulse Width lt Period Wmin e The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between the period and the edgetimeas shown below The function generator will automatically adjust the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period Pulse Width lt Period 1 6 X Edge Time e The pulse width must also be greater than the tot
149. e Deviation The duty cycle deviation represents the variation in duty cycle of the modulated waveform from the duty cycle of the pulse waveform The duty cycle deviation is expressed as a percentage of the period Duty cycle deviation 0 to 100 see below The default is 1 The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wmin Duty Cycle Deviation lt Duty Cycle 100 X Wmin Period and Duty Cycle Deviation lt 100 Duty Cycle 100 X Wmin Period where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10 s but lt 100 s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the current edge time setting Duty Cycle Dev lt Duty Cycle 160 X Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle Dev lt 100 Duty Cycle 160 X Edge Time Period Front Pand Operation After enabling PWM press the Dty CyC Dev softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation Remote nterface Operation PWM DEViation DCYCle lt deviation in percent gt MIN MAX Note The pulsewidth and width deviation and the pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation are coupled in thefront pana interface If you select Width for the pulse waveform and enable PWM the Width Dev softkey is available On theother hand if you sd ect Dty Cyc for the pulse wavef
150. e External source is selected the function generator will accept a hardwaretrigger applied tothe rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the edge polarity specified by the TRIG SLOP command See page 225 e When the Bus software source is selected the function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time a bus trigger command is received To trigger the function generator from the remote interface GPIB USB or LAN when the Bus source selected send the TRG trigger command The front panel Ges illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger e TheAPPLy command automatically sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to TRIG SOUR IMM command 224 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Triggering Commands To ensure synchronization when the Bus source is selected send the WAI wait command When the waAr command is executed the function generator waits for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands For example the following command string guarantees that the first trigger is accepted and the operation is executed before the second trigger is recognized TRIG SOUR BUS TRG WAI TRG WAI You can use the OPc operation complete query command or the OPC operation complete command to signal when the sweep or burst is complete The oPc co
151. e sweep mode Use the SWE SPAC command to select linear or logarithmic spacing for the sweep 208 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands 4 Set the sweep time Use the SWE TIME command to set the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency 5 Select the sweep trigger source Use the TRIG SOUR command to select the source from which the sweep will be triggered 6 Set the marker frequency Optional If desired you can set the frequency at which the signal on the front panel Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep Use the MARK FREQ command to set the marker frequency to any value between the start frequency and stop frequency Use the MARK ON command to enable the frequency marker 7 Enable the sweep mode After you have set up the other sweep parameters usethe SWE STAT ON command to enable the sweep mode 209 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands Sweep Commands FREQuency STARt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency STARt MINimum MAXimum Set the start frequency used in conjunction with the stop frequency Select from 1 wHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 100 Hz MIN 1 uHz MAX 20 MHz The STAR query returns the start frequency in hertz e Tosweep up in frequency set the start frequency lt stop frequency To sweep down in f
152. e terms of such license Restricted Rights Legend If software is for use in the performance of a U S Government prime contract or subcontract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer soft ware as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause Use duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commer cial license terms and non DOD Departments and Agencies of the U S Government will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 June 1987 U S Government users will receive no greater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 June 1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as applicable in any technical data Safety Notices Do not defeat power cord safety ground feature Plug in to a grounded outlet Do not use product in any manner not specified by the manufacturer Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product Return the product to an Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained WARNING A WARNING notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating proce dure practice or the like that if not correc
153. e the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register by executing the ESE 1 command Send the opc command and read the result to ensure synchronization Execute your command string to program the desired configuration and then execute the OPc command as the last command When the command sequence is completed the Operation Complete bit bit 0 is set in the Standard Event register Use a Serial Poll to check to see when bit 5 routed from the Standard Event register is set in the Status Byte condition register You could also configure the function generator for an SRQ interrupt by sending SRE 32 Status Byte enable register bit 5 255 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Questionable Data Register The Questionable Data register group provides information about the quality or integrity of the function generator Any or all of these conditions can be reported to the Questionable Data summary bit through the enable register To set the enable register mask you must write a decimal value to the register using the STAT QUES ENAB1le command Bit Definitions Questionable Data Register Decimal Bit Number Value Definition 0 Voltage Overload 1 Voltage overload on OUTPUT connector The Output has been disabled 1 Not Used 2 Not Used Returns 0 2 Not Used 4 Not Used Returns 0 3 Not Used 8 Not Used Returns 0 4 Not Used 16
154. e the frequency below the carrier frequency FM STATe OFF ON FM STATe Disable or enable FM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable FM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FM and AM at the same time When you enable FM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow FM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FM the sweep or burst mode is turned off 196 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Modulation PM Commands Phase Modulation PM Commands See also Phase Modulation on page 85 in chapter 3 PM Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a PM waveform The commands used for PM are listed on the next page Configure the carrier waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the carrier waveform You can select a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform for the carrier pulse noise and dc are not allowed Select the modulation source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source Select the modulation source using the PM SOUR comm
155. e wave At this point the function generator outputs a PWM waveform with the specified modulation parameters if the output is enabled 6 View the waveform PWM Freg 20 00us 7 To turn off the Graph Mode press e again Of course to really view the PWM waveform you would need to output it to an oscilloscope If you do this you will see how the pulse width varies in this case from 80 to 120 us At a modulation frequency of 5 Hz the deviation is quite visible 41 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Frequency Sweep To Output a Frequency Sweep In the frequency sweep mode the function generator steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify You can sweep up or down in frequency and with either linear or logarithmic spacing For this example you will output a swept sine wave from 50 Hz to 5 kHz You will not change the other parameters from their default settings internal sweep trigger linear spacing and 1 second sweep time reer Ee fr Select the function and amplitude for the sweep For sweeps you can select sine square ramp or arbitrary waveforms pulse noise and dc are not allowed For this example sdect a sinewave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Select the sweep mode Press w and then verify that the linear sweep mode is currently selected Notice that a status message Linear Sweep is shown in the upper
156. eString OUTPut ON Turn on the instrument output End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 304 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example Amplitude Modulation This program found in the E xamples chapter6 AMLowL evel subdirectory on the CD ROM configures a waveform with amplitude modulation using lower level SCPI commands It also shows how to use the SAV command to store the instrument configuration in the function generator s internal memory Private Sub cmdAMLowLevels Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib Formatted1I0488 Set io mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib Formatted1I0488 Set Fgen IO io _mgr Open txtIO Text On Error GoTo MyError This program uses low level SCPI commands to configure the function gnerator to output an AM waveform This program also shows how to use state storage to store the instrument configuration in memory With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors and status registers WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 Output termination is 50 Ohms WriteString FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid Carrier shape is sine WriteString FREQuency 5000 VOLTage 5 Carrier freq is 5 kHz 5 Vpp WriteString AM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid Modulating shape is sine WriteString AM INTernal FREQuency 200 Modulation freq 200 Hz
157. ects the most negative voltage level for the selected function and MAX selects the largest voltage level The HIGH and Low queries return the high and low levels respectively e Limits Dueto Amplitude You can set the voltage levels to a positive or negative value with the restrictions shown below Vpp is the maximum peak to peak amplitude for the selected output termination 10 Vpp for a 50 ohm load or 20 Vpp for a high impedance load V max Vhigh Vlow lt Vpp max and Vhigh Viow lt gt If the specified level is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum voltage allowed F rom the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and thelevel will be adjusted as described e You can set the levels to a positive or negative value but note that the high level must always be greater than the low level If you specify a low level that is greater than the high level the function generator will automatically set the high level to be 1 mV more than the new low level A Settings conflict error will be generated 178 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands Note that when you set the high and low levels you are also setting the amplitude of the waveform For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an offset voltage of 500 mV Limits Dueto Output Termination
158. ed 1 Not Used Returns 0 1 Not Used 2 Not Used Returns 0 2 Error Queue 4 One or more errors are stored in the Error Queue 3 Questionable Data 8 One or more bits are set in the Questionable Data Register bits must be enabled 4 Message Available 16 Data is available in the instrument s output buffer 5 Standard Event 32 One or more bits are set in the Standard Event Register bits must be enabled 6 Master Summary 64 One or more bits are set in the Status Byte Register bits must be enabled 7 Not Used 128 Not Used Returns 0 252 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Status Byte condition register is cleared when e You execute the cLs clear status command e You read the event register from one of the other register groups only the corresponding bits are cleared in the condition register The Status Byte enable register is cleared when e You execute the SRE 0 command e You turn the power on and have previously configured the function generator to clear the enable register using the PSc 1 command Note that the enable register will not be cleared at power on if you have configured the function generator using the PSc o command 253 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System Using Service Request SRQ and Serial Poll You must configure your computer to respond to the IE E E 488 service request SRQ interrupt to
159. ed edge time must fit within the existing period and width The function generator will limit the edge time as needed to accommodate the existing period Data out of range pulse width limited by period value clipped to The specified pulse width must be less than the difference between the period and the edgetimeas shown below The function generator will adjust the pulse width as needed to accommodate the specified period Pulse Width lt Period 1 6 X Edge Time Data out of range pulse duty cycle limited by period value clipped to The specified pulse duty cycle must conform to the following period and edge time restriction The function generator will adjust the pulse duty cycle as needed to accommodate the specified period Duty Cycle lt 100 X Period 1 6 X Edge Time Period 287 222 222 222 222 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Data out of range large period limits minimum pulse width For a pulse waveform the minimum pulse width is 20 ns for periods up to 10 seconds F or periods above 10 seconds the minimum pulse width is greater See Pulse Configuration Commands in chapter 4 for further information Data out of range pulse edge time limited by width value clipped to The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse width as shown below The function generator will adjust the edge time as needed to accommodate the specified pul
160. ed number of points and expands them to fill waveform memory If you download less than 16 384 16K points a waveform with 16 384 points is automatically generated If you download more than 16 384 points a 65 536 point waveform is generated e The values 1 and 1 correspond to the peak values of the waveform if the offset is O volts For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp OV offset 1 corresponds to 5V and 1 corresponds to 5V The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms e Downloading floating point values using DATA VOLATILE is slower than downloading binary values using DATA DAC VOLATILE but is more convenient when using trigonometric functions which return values from 1 to 1 e The DATA command overwrites the previous waveform in volatile memory and no error will be generated Use the DATA COPY command to copy the waveform to non volatile memory e Upto four user defined waveforms can be stored in non volatile memory Use the DATA DEL command to delete the waveform in volatile memory or any of the four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory Use the DATA CAT command to list all waveforms currently stored in volatile and non volatile memory
161. ed to establish an IP address You may need to contact your network administrator for help in establishing communication with the LAN interface Select the 1 O menu DONE Select the LAN menu Press the LAN softkey IP DNS Current Setup Setup Contig DONE From this menu you can select IP Setup to set an IP address and related parameters DNS Setup to configure DNS or Current Config to view the current LAN configuration Establish an IP Setup Touse the Agilent 33220A on the network you must first establish an IP setup including an IP address and possibly a subnet mask and gateway address Press the IP Setup softkey By default DHCP is set to On DONE With DHCP On an IP address will automatically be set by DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol when you connect the Agilent 33220A to the network provided the DHCP server is found and is able to doso DHCP also automatically deals with the subnet mask and gateway 49 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Configure the Remote Interface address if required This is typically the easiest way to establish LAN communication for your instrument All you need to dois leave DHCP On However if you cannot establish communication by means of DHCP you will need to manually set an IP address and a subnet mask and gateway address if they arein use Follow these steps a Set the IP Address Press the softkey to select DHCP Off Th
162. ee phase deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels produce a negative phase shift PM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PM SOUR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle ll e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry P e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry es e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform he with 0 symmetry e If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 198 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Phase Modulation PM Commands PM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum PM INTernal FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PM SOUR INT command Select from 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 20 kHz The FREQ query returns theinte
163. eep the output frequency changes in a constant hertz per second manner In a logarithmic sweep the output frequency changes in a constant octaves per second or decades per second manner Logarithmic sweeps are useful for covering wide frequency ranges where resolution at low frequencies could be lost with a linear sweep You can generate a sweep using an internal trigger source or an external hardware trigger source When the internal source is selected the function generator outputs a continuous sweep at a rate determined by the sweep time specified When the external source is selected the function generator will accept a hardware trigger applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The function generator initiates one sweep each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse A sweep consists of a finite number of small frequency steps Since each step takes the same amount of time longer sweep times result in smaller steps and therefore better resolution The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function generator and is based on the sweep time you select Sync Output pleted tome Main Output Frequency Sweep For triggered sweeps the trigger source can be an external signal the key or a command received from the remote interface The input for external trigger signals is the rear panel Trig In connector This connector accepts TTL co
164. eform Errors Not able to delete a built in arb waveform You cannot delete any of the five built in waveforms EXP_RISE EXP_FALL NEG _ RAMP SINC and CARDIAC Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output FUNC USER command Cannot copy to VOLATILE arb waveform The DATA COPY command copies the waveform from volatile memory to the specified name in non volatile memory The source for the copy is always VOLATILE You cannot copy from any other source and you cannot copy to VOLATILE Block length must be even The function generator represents binary data as 16 bit integers which are sent as two bytes DATA DAC VOLATILE command State has not been stored The storage location that you specified in the RCL command was not used in a previous SAV command You cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location that is empty 300 Application Programs Application Programs This chapter contains several remote interface example programs to help you develop programs for your own application Chapter 4 Remote nterface Reference starting on page 147 lists the syntax for the SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commands available to program the function generator Introduction Six example programs are included in this chapter to demonstrate controlling
165. elays output amplifier 20 dB and output attenuators are operating properly Self test failed internal ADC over range condition This error indicates a probable ADC failure The failure could be of the system ADC U 703 the ADC input multiplexer U 701 or the ADC input buffer amplifier U 702 Self test failed internal ADC measurement error This error indicates a probable ADC failure The failure could be of the system ADC U 703 the ADC input multiplexer U 701 or the ADC input buffer amplifier U 702 Self test failed square pulse DAC test failure This error indicates a probable failure of the square pulse DAC U 1002 297 701 702 703 706 707 707 850 851 Chapter 5 Error Messages Calibration Errors Calibration Errors The following errors indicate failures that may occur during a calibration procedure see chapter 4 in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide Calibration error security defeated by hardware jumper The function generator s calibration security feature has been disabled by temporarily shorting the two CAL ENABLE pads on the internal circuit board as described in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide Calibration error calibration memory is secured A calibration cannot be performed when calibration memory is secured To unsecure the instrument use the CAL SEC STAT ON command with the correct security code Calibration error secure code provided was invalid
166. elect the function frequency amplitude and offset of the carrier waveform You can select a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform for the carrier pulse noise and dc are not allowed Select the modulation source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source Select the modulation source using the FM SOUR command For an external source you can skip steps 3 and 4 bdow Select the shape of the modulating waveform You can modulate the carrier with a sine square ramp noise or arbitrary waveform pulse and dc are not allowed Use the FM INT FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape Set the modulating frequency Set the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using the FM INT FREQ command Set the peak frequency deviation Set the frequency deviation to any value from 1 uHz to 10 05 MHz limited to 150 kHz for ramps and 3 05 MHz for arbitrary waveforms using the FM DEV command Enable FM modulation After you have set up the other modulation parameters use the FM STAT ON command to enable FM 193 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Modulation FM Commands FM Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform FM SOURce INTernal EXTernal FM SOURCe Select the source of the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or ex
167. ep dc sweep turned off The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the dc voltage function The sweep mode has been turned off Settings conflict not able to burst dc burst turned off The function generator cannot generate a burst using the dc voltage function The burst mode has been turned off 282 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict not able to sweep noise sweep turned off Thefunction generator cannot generate a sweep using the noise function The sweep mode has been turned off Settings conflict pulse width decreased due to period For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the pulse width to accommodate the specified period the edge time is already at its minimum setting Settings conflict pulse duty cycle decreased due to period For a pulse waveform the function generator will automatically adjust the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the pulse duty cycle to accommodate the specified period the edge time is already at its minimum setting
168. equency and maximum frequency for the selected function The SPAN query returns the span in hertz can be a positive or negative value Frequency Span max 2 X Max Frequency Center Frequency e Tosweep up in frequency set a positive frequency span To sweep down in frequency set a negative frequency span e The following equation shows the relationship between the span and the start stop frequency Frequency Span Stop Frequency Start Frequency 211 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic SWEep SPACing Select linear or logarithmic spacing for the sweep The default is Linear The SPAC query returns LIN or LOG For alinear sweep the function generator varies the output frequency in a linear fashion during the sweep e For alogarithmic sweep the function generator varies the output frequency in a logarithmic fashion during the sweep SWEep TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum SWEep TIME MINimum MAXimum Set the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency Select from 1 ms to 500 seconds The default is 1 second MIN 1 ms MAX 500 seconds The TIME query returns the sweep time in seconds e The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function generator and is based on the sweep time that you select SWEep STATe OFF ON SWEep
169. er 2 Then press the SELECT softkey to view the errors in the error queue As shown below the first error in the list i e the error at the top of the list is the first error that was generated DONE e Remote nterface Operation SYSTem ERRor Reads oneerror from the error queue Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 255 characters 113 Undefined header 129 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Beeper Control Normally the function generator will emit a tone when an error is generated from the front panel or over the remote interface You may want to disable the front panel beeper for certain applications e The beeper state is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset When shipped from the factory the beeper is enabled e Turning off the beeper does not disable the key click generated when you press a front panel key or turn the knob e Front Paned Operation Press uti from the System menu y and then select the Beep softkey e Remotelnterface Operation SYSTem BEEPer Issue a single beep immediate y SYSTem BEEPer STATe OFF ON Disable enable beeper Display Bulb Saver Thefront panel display bulb will normally turn off and the screen will go blank after 8 hours of inactivity For certain applications you may want to disable the bulb saver feature This featureis av
170. er using the PSc 1 command Note that the enable register will not be cleared at power on if you have configured the function generator using the PSC o command 259 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Status Reporting Commands Status Reporting Commands Use the following commands to access the Status System Registers Status Byte Register Commands See the table on page 252 for the register bit definitions STB Query the summary condition register in this register group This command is similar to a Serial Poll but it is processed like any other instrument command This command returns the same result as a Serial Poll but the Master Summary bit bit 6 is not cleared by the STB command SRE lt ablevalue gt SRE Enable bits in the Status Byte to generate a Service Request To enable specific bits you must write a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of the bits in the register The selected bits are summarized in the Master Summary bit bit 6 of the Status Byte Register If any of the selected bits change from 0 to 1 a Service Request signal is generated The SRE query returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits enabled by the SRE command e A CLS clear status does not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register e A STATus PRESet does not clear the bits in the Status
171. eration STATus PRESet Clear all bits in the Questionable Data enable register and the Standard Operation enable register Psc 0 1 PSC Power On Status Clear Clear the Standard Event enable register and Status Byte condition register at power on PSc 1 When pPsc ois in effect these two registers are not cleared at power on The default is PSC 1 The PSc query returns the power on status clear setting Returns O do not clear at power on or 1 clear at power on OPC Set the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after the previous commands have completed When used with a bus triggered sweep or burst you may have the opportunity to execute commands after the OPc command and beforethe Operation Complete bit is set in the register 263 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Calibration Commands Calibration Commands For an overview of the calibration features of the function generator refer to Calibration Overview in chapter 3 starting on page 141 For a detailed discussion of the function generator s calibration procedures refer to chapter 4 in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide CALibration SECure STATe OFF ON lt code gt CALibration SECure STATe Unsecure or secure the instrument for calibration The calibration code may contain up to 12 characters The STAT query returns 0 OFF or q ON CALibration SETup lt 0 1 2
172. erface e External Gated Burst Mode In this mode the output waveform is either on or off based on the level of the external signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector When the gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform Burst Mode Burst Count Burst Period Burst Phase Trigger Source BURS MODE BURS NCYC BURS INT PER BURS PHAS TRIG SOUR Triggered Burst Mode TRIGgered Available Available Available IMMediate Internal Trigger Triggered Burst Mode RiGgered Available Not Used Available EXTernal BUS External Trigger gated Burst Mode GATed Not Used Not Used Available Not Used External Trigger 216 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands 1 Configure the burst waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the waveform You can select a sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveform noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode and dc is not allowed For internally triggered bursts the minimum frequency is 2 001 mHz For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an
173. eric keypad to enter the desired frequency e Remote nterface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can alsouse the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 81 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Modulating Waveform Shape The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for FM e Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle 1 e Ramp has 100 symmetry a e Triangle has 50 symmetry AN Negative ramp has 0 symmetry gt e You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform e Ifyou select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation e Front Pand Operation After enabling FM press the Shape softkey e Remotelnterface Operation FM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Modulating Waveform Frequency The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for FM e Modulating frequency internal source 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz e Front Pand Operation After enabling FM press the FM Freq softkey e Remotelnterface Operat
174. eriod X Duty Cycle 100 189 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Amplitude Modulation AM Commands Amplitude Modulation AM Commands Se also Amplitude Modulation starting on page 74 in chapter 3 AM Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate an AM waveform The commands used for AM are listed on the next page Configure the carrier waveform Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset of the carrier waveform You can select a sine Square ramp or arbitrary waveform for the carrier pulse noise and dc are not allowed Select the modulation source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source Select the modulation source using the AM SOUR command For an external source you can skip steps 3 and 4 bdow Select the shape of the modulating waveform You can modulate the carrier with a sine square ramp noise or arbitrary waveform pulse and dc are not allowed Use the AM INT FUNC command to select the modulating waveshape Set the modulating frequency Set the modulating frequency to any value from 2 mHz to 20 kHz using the AM INT FREQ command Set the modulation depth Set the modulation depth also called percent modulation to any value from 0 to 120 using the AM DEPT command Enable AM modulation After you have set up the ot
175. ery returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits enabled by the STAT QUES ENAB command 261 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Status Reporting Commands Standard Event Register Commands See the table on page 258 for the register bit definitions ESR Query the Standard Event Status Register Once a bit is set it remains set until cleared by a CLs clear status command or queried by this command A query of this register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in the register ESE lt ablevalue gt ESE Enable bits in the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in the Status Byte The selected bits are summarized in the Standard Event bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register The ESE query returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits enabled by the ESE command e A CLS clear status does not clear the enable register but it does clear all bits in the event register e A STATus PRESet does not clear the bits in the Status Byte enable register e A PSC 0 preserves the contents of the enable register through power cycles 262 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Status Reporting Commands Miscellaneous Status Register Commands CLS Clear the event register in all register groups This command also clears the error queue and cancels a OPC op
176. es 33220A 0 f ff b bb aa p SCPI Language Version Query The function generator complies with the rules and conventions of the present version of SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments You can determine the SCPI version with which the instrument is in compliance by sending a query from the remote interface You cannot query the SCPI version from the front pand e Remotelnterface Operation SYSTem VERSion Returns a string in the form YYYY V where YYYY represents the year of the version and V represents a version number for that year e g 1999 0 134 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration Remote Interface Configuration This section gives information on configuring the function generator for remote interface communication F or information on configuring the instrument from the front panel see To Configure the Remote Interface starting on page 48 For information on the SCPI commands available to program the function generator over the remote interface see chapter 4 Remote nterface Reference starting on page 147 The Agilent 33220A supports remote interface communication using a choice of three interfaces GPIB USB and LAN All three interfaces are live at power up This section describes some interface configuration parameters that you may need to set on your function generator Note TheCD ROM provided with your instrument contains connec
177. es autoranging 166 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command DC Offset Voltage For the offset parameter of the APPLy command you can substitute MINimum MAXimum or DEF ault in place of a specific value for the parameter MIN selects the most negative dc offset voltage for the function and amplitude specified MAX selects the largest dc offset for the function and amplitude specified The default offset is 0 volts for all functions e Limits Dueto Amplitude The relationship between offset voltage and output amplitude is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50 load or 10 volts for a high impedance load Voffset lt Vmax pe If the specified offset voltage is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum dc voltage allowed with the amplitude specified From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the offset will be adjusted as described e Limits Dueto Output Termination The offset limits are determined by the current output termination setting the APPLy command does not change the termination setting For example if you set the offset to 100 mVdc and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the offset voltage displayed on the function generator s front panel will double to 200 mVdc and no error will be generated If y
178. et setting 0 5 of ampl 2 mV 4 digits 50 Q typical 42 Vpk maximum to earth Short circuit protected overload automatically disables main output Internal Frequency Reference Accuracy P 10 ppm in 90 days 20 ppm in 1 year External Frequency Reference Option 001 Rear Panel Input Lock Range Level Impedance Lock Time Rear Panel Output Frequency Level Impedance 10 MHz 500 Hz 100 mVpp to 5 Vpp 1 KQ typical AC coupled lt 2 seconds 10 MHz 632 mVpp 0 dBm typical 50 Q typical AC coupled Phase Offset Range Resolution Accuracy Modulation AM Carrier Waveforms Source Internal Modulation Depth FM Carrier Waveforms Source Internal Modulation Deviation PM Carrier Waveforms Source Internal Modulation Deviation PWM Carrier Waveforms Source Internal Modulation Deviation 360 to 360 degrees 0 001 degrees 20 ns Sine Square Ramp Arb Internal External Sine Square Ramp Triangle Noise Arb 2 mHz to 20 kHz 0 0 to 120 0 Sine Square Ramp Arb Internal External Sine Square Ramp Triangle Noise Arb 2 mHz to 20 kHz DC to 10 MHz Sine Square Ramp Arb Internal External Sine Square Ramp Triangle Noise Arb 2 mHz to 20 kHz 0 0 to 360 0 degrees Pulse Internal External Sine Square Ramp Triangle Noise Arb 2 mHz to 20 kHz 0 to 100 of pul
179. evel as an Offset Enter 1 0 Vdc with the numeric keypad or knob i 000 Vic JO Voe Fane D Off Offset You can enter any dc voltage from 5 Vdc to 5 Vdc 22 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave At power on the duty cycle for square waves is 50 You can adjust the duty cycle from 20 to 80 for output frequencies up to 10 MHz The following steps show you how to change the duty cycle to 30 Select the square wave function Press the key and then set the desired output frequency to any value up to 10 MHz Press the Duty Cycle softkey The displayed duty cycle is either the power on value or the percentage previously selected The duty cycle represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high level note the icon on the right side of the display 0 E Em Mmi im Period HiLewel LoLewe Enter the desired duty cycle Using the numeric keypad or the knob select a duty cycle value of 30 The function generator adjusts the duty cycle immediately and outputs a square wave with the specified value if the output is enabled a0 TD Em Mai um Period HiLewel LoLewe 23 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Configure a Pulse Waveform To Configure a Pulse Waveform You can configure the function generator to output a pulse waveform with variable pulse width and edge time The fol
180. f the carrier Press Sime and then press the Freq Ampl and Offset softkeys to configure the carrier waveform For this example sd ect a 5 KHz sinewave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Select AM Med and then select AM using the Type softkey Notice that a status message AM by Sine is shown in the upper left corner of the display Set the modulation depth Press the AM Depth softkey and then set the value to 80 using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys 36 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Modulated Waveform 4 Set the modulating frequency Press the AM Freq softkey and then set the value to 200 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys 5 Select the modulating waveform shape Press the Shape softkey to select the shape of the modulating waveform For this example select a sine wave At this point the function generator outputs an AM waveform with the specified modulation parameters if the output is enabled 6 View the waveform P ress Graph to view the waveform parameters 37 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output an FSK Waveform To Output an FSK Waveform You can configure the function generator to shift its output frequency between two preset values using FSK modulation The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determine
181. face Connector Option 001 only 6 LAN Interface Connector 2 Internal 10 MHz Reference Output Terminal 7 GPIB Interface Connector Option 001 only 8 Chassis Ground 3 External Modulation Input Terminal 4 Input External Trig FSK Burst Gate Output Trigger Output utiy menu to Select the GPIB address see chapter 2 e Set the network parameters for the LAN interface see chapter 2 e Display the current network parameters see chapter 2 Note The External and Internal 10 MHz ReferenceTerminals 1 and 2 above are present only if Option 001 External Timebase Reference is installed Otherwise the holes for these connectors are plugged For protection from dectrical shock the power cord ground must not be defeated If only a two contact electrical outlet is available connect the instrument s chassis ground screw See above to a good earth ground In This Book Quick Start Chapter 1 prepares the function generator for use and helps you get familiar with a few of its front panel features Front Panel Menu Operation Chapter 2 introduces you to the front panel menu and describes some of the function generator s menu features Features and Functions Chapter 3 gives a detailed description of the function generator s capabilities and operation You will find this chapter useful whether you are operating the function generator from the front panel or over the remote interface Remote Interface Reference Chapter 4 c
182. ference Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands FSK Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform FSKey SOURce INTernal EXTernal FSKey SOURce Select an internal or external FSK source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT e When the Internal source is selected the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and hop frequency is determined by the FSK rate specified FSK INT RATE command e When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output The maximum external FSK rateis 1 MHz e Notethat the connector used for externally controlled FSK waveforms Trig In is not the same connector that is used for externally modulated AM FM PM and PWM waveforms Modulation In When used for FSK the Trig In connector does not have adjustable edge polarity and is not affected by the TRIG SLOP command 201 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Shift Keying FSK Commands FSKey FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FSKey FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the FSK alternate or hop frequency Select from 1 wHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kH
183. forma calibration you must unsecure the function generator by entering the correct security code If you forget your security code you can disable the security feature by means of two CAL ENABLE pads on the main PC board inside the instrument See the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for more information e Thesecurity code is set to AT33220A when the function generator is shipped from the factory The security code is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e The security code may contain up to 12 alphanumeric characters The first character must bea letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or an underscore _ You do not have to use all 12 characters but the first character must always be a letter 141 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Calibration Overview To Unsecure for Calibration You can unsecure the function generator either from the front panel or over the remote interface The function generator is secured when shipped from the factory and the security code is set to AT 33220A e Once you enter a security code that code must be used for both front panel and remote operation For example if you secure the function generator from the front panel you must use that same code to unsecure it from the remote interface e Front Pand Operation Press wily and then select the Secure Off softkey from the
184. formation as the date when the last calibration was performed the date when the next calibration is due the function generator s serial number or the name and phone number of the person to contact for a new calibration e You can record a calibration message only from the remote interface and only when the function generator is unsecured You can read the message from either the front panel or over the remote interface You can read the calibration message whether the function generator is secured or unsecured e The calibration message may contain up to 40 characters additional characters are truncated e Storing a calibration message will overwrite any message previously stored in memory e The calibration message is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front Pane Operation Press vuy and then select the Cal Info softkey from the Test Cal menu The calibration message is listed as one of the messages on the display e Remotelnterface Operation To store the calibration message send the following command including any desired string within the single quotes CAL STR Cal Due 01 August 2003 144 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Factory Default Settings Factory Default Settings The table on the following page summarizes the factory default settings for the Agilent 33220A For your convenience this tableis duplicated ins
185. frequency resolution internally Note that only the 14 or 16 most significant bits of the Phase Register are used to address waveform memory Therefore when synthesizing low frequencies less than 3 05 kHz for a typical 16K point waveform the address will not change in every clock cycle However at higher frequencies greater than 3 05 kHz the address will change by more than one location during each clock cycle and some points will be skipped If too many points are skipped a phenomenon known as aliasing will occur and the waveform output will become somewhat distorted The Nyquist Sampling Theorem states that in order to prevent aliasing the highest frequency component of the desired output waveform must be less than half of the sampling frequency 25 MHz for the 33220A 315 Chapter 7 Tutorial Creating Arbitrary Waveforms Creating Arbitrary Waveforms The Agilent 33220A allows you to create arbitrary waveforms of up to 64 K points 65 536 points and provides five built in examples of arbitrary waveforms You can create an arbitrary waveform from the front panel or you can use the Agilent IntuiLink software provided on the CD ROM included with the Agilent 33220A The Agilent I ntuiLink software allows you to create arbitrary waveforms using a graphical user interface on your PC and then download them into the Agilent 33220A You can also capture waveforms from your Agilent oscilloscope and import them into I
186. fset value clipped to This generic message indicates that the offset voltage has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range frequency in burst mode value clipped to This generic message indicates that the frequency has been limited to an upper or lower boundary as dictated by the burst period Data out of range frequency in FM value clipped to This generic message indicates that the carrier frequency has been limited to a lower boundary as determined by the FM DEV command The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the frequency deviation Data out of range marker confined to sweep span value clipped to This generic message indicates that the specified marker frequency is outside the range of the start frequency and stop frequency The marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency If you attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency not in this range the function generator will automatically set the marker frequency equal to the start frequency or stop frequency whichever is closer This error is generated only when both the sweep mode and the marker frequency are enabled Data out of range pulse width value clipped to This generic message indicates that the desired pulse width is limited to an upper or lower boundary which is dictated by the instrument hardware 290 222 222 222 222 222 222
187. g You may have used an invalid character such as or in the command header or within a parameter Example TRIG SOUR BUS Syntax error Invalid syntax was found in the command string You may have inserted a blank space before or after a colon in the command header or before a comma Example APPL SIN 1 Invalid separator An invalid separator was found in the command string You may have used a comma instead of a colon semicolon or blank space or you may have used a blank space instead of a comma Examples TRIG SOUR BUS or APPL SIN 1 1000 GET not allowed A Group Execute Trigger GET is not allowed within a command string Parameter not allowed More parameters were received than were expected for the command You may have entered an extra parameter or added a parameter toa command that does not require a parameter Example APPL 10 Missing parameter Fewer parameters were received than were expected for this command You have omitted one or more parameters that are required for this command Example OUTP LOAD 275 112 113 123 124 128 131 138 148 151 Chapter 5 Error Messages Command Errors Program mnemonic too long A command header was received which contained more than the maximum 12 characters allowed This error is also reported when a character type parameter is too long Example OUTP SYNCHRONIZATION ON Undefined header A command was received that is not va
188. ge error will be gnerated and the deviation will be adjusted as described e Thesum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz 20 1 MHz for sine and square 300 kHz for ramp and 6 1 MHz for arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to set the deviation toa value that is not valid the function generator will automatically adjust it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency From theremote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the deviation will be adjusted as described 195 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Modulation FM Commands e Ifthe deviation causes the carrier waveform to exceed a frequency boundary for the current duty cycle square waveform only the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency From the renoteinterface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described e Ifyou select the External modulating source FM SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the frequency deviation to 100 kHz then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduc
189. ge 184 for more information e Limits Dueto Units Selection In some cases the amplitude limits are determined by the output units selected This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and the amplitude will be adjusted as described e Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited to 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms e While changing amplitude you may notice a momentary disruption in the output waveform at certain voltages due to switching of the output attenuators The amplitude is controlled however so the output voltage will never exceed the current setting while switching ranges To prevent this disruption in the output you can disable the voltage autoranging feature using the VOLT RANG AUTO command see page 179 for more information The APPLy command automatically enabl
190. gered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the sweep When the Manual trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 us pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep or burst Front Pand Operation After enabling sweeps press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Trig Out softkey Remote nterface Operation OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger OFF oON 105 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Mode You can configure the function generator to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles called a burst The function generator can produce a burst using sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveforms noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode and dc is not allowed For moreinformation on the fundamentals of the burst mode refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select Burst e The function generator will not allow burst to be enabled at the same time that sweep or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable burst the sweep or modulation mode is turned off e Front Pane Operation You must enable burst before setting up any of the other burst parameters Press t to output a burst using the present settings for frequency output amplitude and offset voltage e Remotelnterface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable the burst mode after you have se
191. gured to automatically recall the factory default state at power on 126 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations You can assign a custom name to each of the storage locations however you cannot name location 0 from the front panel You can name a location from the front panel or over the remote interface but you can only recall a state by name from the front panel From the remote interface you can only recall a stored state using a number 0 through 4 The name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed An error will be generated if you specify a name with more than 12 characters The function generator will not prevent you from assigning the same custom name to different storage locations For example you can assign the same name to locations 1 and 2 If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non volatile memory after storing the instrument state the waveform data is lost and the function generator will not output the waveform when the state is recalled The built in exponential rise waveform is output in place of the deleted waveform The front panel display state see Display Control on page 132 is saved when you store the instrument state When you recall the state the front panel display will return to the
192. he order in which thebytes aredownloaded using the FORM BORD command Select the waveform frequency amplitude and offset Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the frequency amplitude and offset of the waveform 227 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands 3 Copy the arbitrary waveform to non volatile memory You can output the arbitrary waveform directly from volatile memory or you can copy the waveform to non volatile memory using the DATA COPY command 4 Select the arbitrary waveform to output You can select one of the five built in arbitrary waveforms one of four user defined waveforms or the waveform currently downloaded to volatile memory Use the FUNC USER command to select the waveform 5 Output the selected arbitrary waveform Usethe FUNC USER command to output the waveform previously selected with the FUNC USER command The five built in arbitrary waveforms are shown bedow VI JKR Exponential Rise Exponential Fall Negative Ramp mille of Sinc Cardiac 228 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA VOLATILE lt value lt value Download floating point values from 1 to 1 into volatile memory You can download from 1 to 65 536 64K points per waveform The function generator takes the specifi
193. he Sync signal isa TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency For a triggered burst the Sync signal isa TTL high when the burst begins The Sync signal is a TTL low at the end of the specified number of cycles may not be the Zero crossing point if the waveform has an associated start phase For an infinite count burst the Sync signal is the same as for a continuous waveform For an externally gated burst the Sync signal follows the external gate signal However note that the signal will not gotoa TTL low until the end of the last cycle may not be the zero crossing point if the waveform has an associated start phase Front Pand Operation Press v to toggle between off and on ty and select the Sync softkey again Remote nterface Operation OUTPut SYNC OFF ON Setting is stored in non volatile memory 69 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Waveforms Pulse Waveforms A shown below a pulse waveform consists of a period a pulse width a rising edge and a falling edge 90 90 50 50 n a Pulse Width 10 10 fa a Rise Time Fall Time Period Pulse Period e Pulse period 200 ns to 2000 s Thedefault is 1 ms e The specified period must be greater than the sum of the pulse width and the edgetimeas shown below The function generator will adjust the pulse width and edge time as needed to accommodate th
194. heck the list of parameters to verify that you have used a valid parameter type Example BURS NCYC TEN Invalid block data Applies only totheDATA DAC VOLATILE command For a definitelength block the number of bytes of data sent does not match the number of bytes that you specified in the block header For an indefinite length block an EOI End or I dentify was received without an accompanying new line gt character Block data not allowed Data was sent to the function generator in arbitrary block format but this command does not accept this format Check to see if you have sent the correct data type with the command Example BURS NCYC 10 Expression errors The function generator does not accept mathematical expressions 277 211 223 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Execution Errors Trigger ignored A Group Execute Trigger GET or TRG was received but the trigger was ignored Make sure that you have selected the proper trigger source and verify that the sweep or burst mode is enabled Too much data An arbitrary waveform was specified that contains more than 65 536 waveform points Verify the number of points in the DATA VOLATILE or DATA DAC VOLATILE Command Settings conflict turned off infinite burst to allow immediate trigger source An infinite count burst is allowed only when the external or bus software trigger source is selected The burst count has
195. hen you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off Settings conflict not able to modulate this function The function generator cannot generate an AM FM PM or FSK modulated waveform using the pulse noise or dc voltage functions 281 221 221 221 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict PWM only available in pulse function The function generator cannot generate a PWM modulated waveform using any function other than pulse Settings conflict not able to sweep this function The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the pulse noise or dc voltage functions Settings conflict not able to burst this function The function generator cannot generate a burst using the dc voltage function Settings conflict not able to modulate noise modulation turned off The function generator cannot generate a modulated waveform using the noise function The selected modulation mode has been turned off Settings conflict not able to sweep pulse sweep turned off The function generator cannot generate a sweep using the pulse function The sweep mode has been turned off Settings conflict not able to modulate dc modulation turned off The function generator cannot generate a modulated waveform using the dc voltage function The selected modulation mode has been turned off Settings conflict not able to swe
196. her modulation parameters use the AM STAT ON command to enable AM 190 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Amplitude Modulation AM Commands AM Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform AM SOURce INTernal EXTernal AM SOURce Select the source of the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT e If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 using the AM DEPT command then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude AM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected AM SOUR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER
197. ible square waveform with the specified edge is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst Select POS to output a pulse with a rising edge or select NEG to output a pulse with a falling edge The default is POS The SLOP query returns POS or NEG e When the Immediate internal trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector The period of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time SWE TIME command or burst period BURS INT PER command plus 1 ms e When the External trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the sweep or burst e When the Bus software trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR BUS command the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 us pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep or burst OUTPut TRIGger OFF ON OUTPut TRIGger Disable or enable the trigger out signal used for sweep and burst only When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge OUTP TRIG SLOP command is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of
198. ically adjusted tothe maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 12 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 the upper limit for this frequency From theremoteinterface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described e If you select a square waveform as the modulating waveform for AM FM PM or PWM the duty cycle setting does not apply The function generator always uses a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle 180 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion RAMP SYMMetry MINimum MAXimum Set the symmetry percentage for ramp waves Symmetry represents the amount of time per cycle that the ramp wave is rising assuming that the waveform polarity is not inverted You can set the symmetry to any value from 0 to 100 The default is 100 MIN 0 MAX 100 The SYMM query returns the current symmetry setting in percent 0 Symmetry 100 Symmetry e For ramp waveforms the APPLy command overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 e The symmetry setting is remembered when you change from ramp wave to another function When you return to the ramp wave function the previous symmetry is used e If you select a ramp waveform as the modul
199. ice without any characters in between The following command uses a string parameter DISPlay TEXT lt quoted string gt 270 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using Device Clear Using Device Clear Device Clear is an E E E 488 low level bus message that you can use to return the function generator to a responsive state Different programming languages and EEE 488 interface cards provide access to this capability through their own unique commands The status registers the error queue and all configuration states are left unchanged when a Device Clear message is received Device Clear performs the following actions e The function generator s input and output buffers are cleared e The function generator is prepared to accept a new command string e An overlapped command if any will be terminated with no Operation Complete indication applies to the TRG command Any sweep or burst in progress will be aborted immediately 271 272 Error Messages Error Messages e Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them The function generator beeps once each time an error is generated unless you have disabled the beeper e If morethan 20 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with Queue overflow No additional errors are st
200. ide the rear cover of this manual and on the Quick Reference Card Note The power on state will be different than that in the table if you have enabled the power down recall mode See Instrument State Storage on page 126 145 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Factory Default Settings Agilent 33220A Factory Default Settings Output Configuration Factory Setting Function Sine wave Frequency 1 kHz Amplitude Offset 100 mVpp 0 000 Vdc Output Units Vpp Output Termination 50 Q Autorange On Modulation Factory Setting Carrier AM FM PM FSk 1 kHz Sine wave Carrier PWM 1 kHz Pulse Mod Waveform AM Mod Waveform FM PM PWM 100 Hz Sine wave 10 Hz Sine wave AM Depth 100 FM Deviation 100 Hz PM Deviation 180 degrees FSK Hop Frequency 100 Hz FSK Rate 10 Hz PWM Width Deviation 10 us Modulation State Off Sweep Factory Setting Start Stop Frequency 100 Hz 1 kHz Sweep Time 1 Second Sweep Mode Linear Sweep State Off Burst Factory Setting Burst Count 1 Cycle Burst Period 10 ms Burst Start Phase 0 degrees Burst State Off System Related Operations Factory Setting Power Down Recall Disabled Display Mode On Error Queue Errors are Cleared Stored States Stored Arbs No Change Output State Off Triggering Operations Trigger Source Factory Setting Internal Immediate Remote Interface Configuration Factory Setting e GPIB Address e 10 DHCP e On e IP Address e 169 254
201. ie waveform and a modulating waveform In FM the frequency of the carrier is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform For moreinformation on the fundamentals of Frequency Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select FM Modulation e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FM and AM at the same time When you enable FM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow FM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable FM the sweep or burst mode is turned off e Front Pane Operation You must enable FM before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Press ea and then select FM using the Type softkey The FM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage e Remotelnterface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable FM after you have set up the other modulation parameters FM STATe OFF ON 79 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Carrier Waveform Shape FM carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform Thedefault is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform Front Pand Operation Press any of the front panel function keys except Pulse For arbitrary waveforms press and then
202. iggered burst The default is POS rising edge The SLOP query returns POS or NEG 222 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted BURSt GATE POLarity Select whether the function generator uses true high or true low logic levels on the rear panel Trig In connector for an externally gated burst The default is NORM true high logic The POL query returns NORM or INV OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe Select a rising or falling edge for the trigger out signal When enabled using the OUTP TRIG command see below a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst Select POS to output a pulse with a rising edge or select NEG to output a pulse with a falling edge The default is POS The SLOP query returns POS or NEG e When the Immediate internal trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector The period of the waveform is equal to the specified burst period BURS INT PER command e When the External trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command or when the Gated mode is selected BURS MODE GAT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal
203. ilt in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited to 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms While changing amplitude you may notice a momentary disruption in the output waveform at certain voltages due to switching of the output attenuators To prevent this disruption in the output you can disable the voltage autoranging feature as described on page 66 You can also set the amplitude with an associated offset voltage by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an offset voltage of 500 mV For dc volts the output level is actually controlled by setting the offset voltage You can set the dc level to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into an open circuit See DC Offset Voltage on the following page for moreinformation To select dc volts from the front panel press viiy and then select the DC On softkey Press the Offset softkey to set the desired offset voltage level Front Pand Operation To set the output amplitude press the Ampl softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired amplitude To set the amplitude using a high level and low level press the Ampl softkey again to toggle to the HiLevel and LoLevel softkeys 59 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration
204. ime Trig In receives a TTL pulse with the specified edge See also Trigger Input Signal on the following page e Front Pand Operation The external trigger mode is like the manual trigger mode except that you apply the trigger tothe Trig In connector To select the external source press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the Source Ext softkey To specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the desired edge by pressing the Slope softkey e Remotelnterface Operation TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Use the following command to specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Software Bus Triggering The bus trigger mode is available only from the remote interface This mode is similar to the manual trigger mode from the front panel but you trigger the function generator by sending a bus trigger command The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time a bus trigger command is received e Toselect the bus trigger source send the following command TRIGger SOURce BUS e Totrigger the function generator from the remote interface GPIB USB or LAN when the Bus source selected send the TRIG or TRG trigger command The front panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger 117 Chapter 3 Features and Functions
205. in seconds required to complete a sweep e Specify a marker frequency e Specify an internal or external trigger source for the sweep Specify the slope rising or falling edge for an external trigger source Specify the slope rising or falling edge of the Trig Out signal e e e e Configure the parameters for burst e Select the triggered N Cycle or externally gated burst mode Select the number of cycles per burst 1 to 50 000 or Infinite Select the starting phase angle of the burst 360 to 360 Specify the time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst e Specify an internal or external trigger source for the burst Specify the slope rising or falling edge for an external trigger source Specify the slope rising or falling edge of the Trig Out signal e e e e e 33 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation Front Panel Menu Reference Store and recall instrument states e Store up to four instrument states in non volatile memory Assign a custom name to each storage location Recall stored instrument states Restore all instrument settings to their factory default values Select the instrument s power on configuration last or factory default e e e Configure system related parameters e Generate a dc only voltage level Enable disable the Sync signal which is output from the Sync
206. ing H owever momentary disruptions or glitches caused by switching can cause problems in some applications For this reason the 33220A incorporates a range hold feature to freeze the attenuator and amplifier switches in their current states However the amplitude and offset accuracy and resolution as well as waveform fidelity may be adversely affected when reducing the amplitude below the expected range change 322 Chapter 7 Tutorial Ground Loops As shown below the 33220A has a fixed series output impedance of 509 forming a voltage divider with the load resistance Agilent 33220A As a convenience you can specify the load impedance as seen by the function generator and thereby display the correct load voltage If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude offset and high low levels will be incorrect Variations in source resistance are measured and taken into account during an instrument calibration Therefore the accuracy of the load voltage depends primarily on the accuracy of the load resistance as shown below 50 R 50 AV x AR Ground Loops The signal generation portion of the Agilent 33220A is isolated from chassis earth ground This isolation helps to eliminate ground loops in your system and also allows you to reference the output signal to voltages other than ground The illustration on the following page shows the function generator connec
207. ing characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character _ e Toadd additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob e Todelete all characters to the right of the cursor press the key For this example assign the name RAMP_NEW to memory location 1 and then press the STORE ARB softkey to store the waveform RAMP_NEQyj ar fA Arb STOR Mem 1 Mem2 Mem3 Mem 4 ARB CANCEL The waveform is now stored in non volatile memory and is currently being output from the function generator The name that you used to store the waveform should now appear in the list of stored waveforms under the Stored Wform softkey 124 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms Additional Information on Arbitrary Waveforms As a shortcut to determine which arbitrary waveform is selected Arb J A temporary message is displayed on the front panel In addition to creating a new arbitrary waveform from the front panel you can also edit existing user defined waveforms of 16 384 or fewer data points Larger waveforms up to 65 536 points are not editable from thefront pand and may not be sd ected for editing You can edit small waveforms up to 16 384 points that were created either from the front panel or from the remote interface However you cannot edit any of the five built in arbitrary waveforms Press the Edit Wform soft
208. ing the amplitude below the expected range change The ONCE parameter has the same effect as turning autoranging ON and then OFF This parameter allows you to make a onetime change to the amplifier attenuator setting before returning to the VOLT RANG AUTO OFF setting 179 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands FUNCtion SQUare DCYyCle lt percent gt MINimum MAXimum FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle MINimum MAXimum Set the duty cycle percentage for square waves Duty cycle represents the amount of time per cycle that the square wave is at a high leva assuming that the waveform polarity is not inverted The default is 50 MIN selects the minimum duty cycle for the selected frequency and MAX selects the maximum duty cycle See restrictions below The Dcyc query returns the current duty cycle setting in percent 20 Duty Cycle 80 Duty Cycle e Duty Cycle 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz e For square waveforms the APPLy command overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 e The duty cyclesetting is remembered when you change from square wave to another function When you return to the square wave function the previous duty cycle is used e Limits Dueto Frequency If the square wave function is selected and you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automat
209. into 50 ohms for all functions Limits Dueto Output Termination The output amplitude limits are determined by the current output termination setting the APPLy command does not change the termination setting For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will doubleto 20 Vpp and no error will be generated If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half See the ouTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information You can set the output amplitude in Vpp Vrms or dBm by specifying the units as part of the APPLy command as shown below APPL SIN 5 0E 3 3 0 VRMS 2 5 Or you can use the VOLT UNIT command see page 184 to specify the output units for all commands that follow Unless you specify the units as part of the APPLy command the VOLT UNIT command takes precedence F or example if you select Vrms using the VOLT UNIT command and do not include units with the APPLy command the value specified for the amplitude parameter in the APPLy command will bein Vrms 165 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command e You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp Seethe VOLT UNIT command on pa
210. iod The burst period defines time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst Used in theinternal triggered burst mode only Keep in mind that burst period is different than the waveform frequency which specifies the frequency of the bursted signal Burst period 1 us to 500 seconds The default is 10 ms The burst period setting is used only when Internal triggering is enabled The burst period is ignored when manual or external triggering is enabled or when the gated burst mode is selected It is not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the function generator to output with the specified burst count and frequency see bd ow If the burst period is too short the function generator will automatically adjust it as needed to continuously re trigger the burst Burst Period gt BurstCount__ 999 ns Waveform F requency Front Pand Operation To set the burst period press the Burst Period softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the period Remote nterface Operation BURSt INTernal PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 111 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Phase The burst phase defines the starting phase of the burst Burst phase 360 degrees to 360 degrees The default is 0 degres From the remote interface you can set the starting phase in degrees or radians using the UNIT ANGL command see page 221 From the front pa
211. ion FM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 82 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Frequency Deviation The frequency deviation setting represents the peak variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier frequency Frequency deviation 1 wHz to 10 05 MHz limited to 150 kHz for ramps and 3 05 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 100 Hz The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the function generator will limit the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency The sum of the carrier frequency and deviation must be less than or equal to the maximum frequency for the selected function plus 100 kHz 20 1 MHz for sine and square 300 kHz for ramp and 6 1 MHz for arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to set the deviation toa value that is not valid the function generator will limit it to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency Front Pand Operation After enabling FM press the Freq Dev softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation Remote nterface Operation FM DEViation lt peak deviation in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum 83 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Modulating Source The function generator will accept
212. ion 44 gate polarity 223 225 gated burst 334 gated mode 216 modes available 216 n cycle burst 333 overview 216 starting phase 220 333 trigger delay 333 trigger out signal 114 trigger output 119 trigger source 113 triggered mode 107 216 waveform frequency 109 burst phase degrees vs radians 221 bus interface configuration 48 135 bus software trigger 213 221 224 bus trigger 117 225 byte order binary block transfers 232 C CALibration COUNt command 265 SECure CODE command 265 STATe command 264 SETup command 264 STRing command 265 VALue command 264 calibration commands 264 error messages 298 message 144 read count 143 reading count 265 securing 264 security code 141 setups 264 storing text message 265 unsecuring 264 calibration certificate 15 CALibration command 264 cardiac waveform 228 carriage return 269 carrying handle changing positions 16 removing 29 catalog arbitrary waveforms 235 CD ROM connectivity software 15 CD ROM shipped with 33220A 302 center frequency sweep 211 chassis ground 6 comma separator 133 command errors 129 242 command parameter types 270 command reference 147 command summary 149 command terminators 269 command trigger 225 configuration GPIB 48 135 LAN 48 135 140 remote interface 48 135 USB 48 135 342 Index connector 10 MHz In 248 10 MHz Out 248 Modulation In 78 84 92 98 Output 181 Sync Output 68 Sync output 215 Trig In 118
213. ion Sweep Burst Keys 10 Output Enable Disable Key 4 State Storage Menu Key 11 Knob 5 Utility Menu Key 12 Cursor Keys 6 Help Menu Key 13 Sync Connector 7 Menu Operation Softkeys 14 Output Connector 8 Waveform Selection Keys Note To get context sensitive hd p on any front pand key or menu softkey press and hold down that key The Front Panel Display at a Glance Menu Mode Mode Trigger Output Information Information Units Status Numeric y __ Display Readout Icon Gated Infinite Softkey Labels Graph Mode Toenter or exit the Graph Mode press the Graph Parameter Parameter Name Value Frequency OQ 000 O KHZ 100 0m p p 4 Signal ite Ground In Graph Mode only one parameter label is displayed for each key at one time Front Panel Number Entry You can enter numbers from the front pand using one of two methods Use the knob and cursor keys to modify the displayed number 1 Use the keys below the knob to move the cursor left or right 2 Rotate the knob to change a digit clockwise to increase Use the keypad to enter numbers and the softkeys to select units aa 1 Key in a value as you would on a typical calculator Ta ih a 2 Select a unit to enter the value Se E 2 faj Select the units by pressing a key below AT OY MHz CANCEL WARNING The Rear Panel at a Glance 1 External 10 MHz Reference Input Terminal 5 USB Inter
214. is 900 Hz To sweep up in frequency set a positive frequency span To sweep down in frequency set a negative frequency span For sweeps with Marker Off the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal isa TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the midpoint of the sweep The frequency of the sync waveform is equal to the specified sweep time The signal is output from the front panel Sync connector For sweeps with Marker On the Sync signal isa TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the marker frequency The signal is output from the front panel Sync connector Front Pand Operation After enabling sweeps press the Start or Stop softkey again to toggle to the Center or Span softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired values Remote nterface Operation FREQuency CENTer lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency SPAN lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 101 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Sweep Mode You can sweep with either linear or logarithmic spacing For a linear sweep the function generator varies the output frequency in a linear fashion during the sweep For a logarithmic sweep the function generator varies the output frequency in a logarithmic fashion e Sweep mode Linear or Logarithmic The default is Linear e Front Pand Operation After enabling sweeps press the Linear softke
215. is generated 237 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference State Storage Commands State Storage Commands The function generator has five storage locations in non volatile memory to store instrument states The locations are numbered 0 through 4 The function generator automatically uses location 0 to hold the state of the instrument at power down You can also assign a user defined name to each of the locations 1 through 4 for use from the front panel SAV 0 1 2 3 4 Store save the current instrument state in the specified non volatile storage location Any state previously stored in the same location will be overwritten and no error will be generated e You can store the instrument state in any of the five storage locations However you can only recall a state from a location that contains a previously stored state e From the remote interface only you can use storage location 0 to store a fifth instrument state you cannot store to this location from the front panel However note that location 0 is automatically overwritten when power is cycled the instrument state previously stored will be overwritten e The state storage feature remembers the selected function including arbitrary waveforms frequency amplitude dc offset duty cycle symmetry as well as any modulation parameters in use e If you delete an arbitrary waveform from non volatile memory after storing the instrument
216. is used in digital audio applications motor control circuitry switching power supplies and other control applications The Agilent 33220A provides PWM for pulse waveforms and PWM is the only type of modulation supported for pulse waveforms For PWM the amplitude of the modulating waveform is sampled digitally and used to control the pulse width or duty cycle of the pulse waveform Modulating Signal Modulated Waveform Pulse Width Modulation The variation of pulse width in the modulated waveform from the pulse width of the pulse waveform is called the width deviation The deviation can also be expressed in terms of duty cycle as a percentage referenced to the period of the pulse waveform which is called the duty cycle deviation In PWM the deviation of width or duty cycle is symmetrical around the pulse width or duty cycle of the original pulse waveform F or example if you specify a pulse waveform with a 10 duty cycle and then specify PWM with a duty cycle deviation of 5 the modulated waveform will have a pulse that varies in duty cycle from 5 to 15 under control of the modulating waveform 331 Chapter 7 Tutorial Frequency Sweep Frequency Sweep Frequency sweeping is similar to FM but no modulating waveform is used Instead the function generator sets the output frequency based on either a linear or logarithmic function In a linear sw
217. ization errors 321 questionable data register bit definitions 256 commands 261 operation 256 queue error 129 242 quick reference commands 149 quick start 13 R rack mounting kits 30 radians 220 ramp waveform symmetry 65 181 range hold 179 322 range hold amplitude 66 rear panel connectors 6 overview 6 recalling stored state 239 reference external 248 register diagram registers 251 registers status 250 remote bus trigger 117 status 348 Index remote errors 129 242 data out of range errors 287 settings conflict errors 278 arbitrary waveform errors 299 calibration errors 298 execution errors 278 instrument errors 295 query errors 294 self test errors 296 remote interface command reference 147 command summary 149 configuration 48 135 remote trigger 225 remove arb waveforms 236 remove stored state 240 reset 35 244 resistance load 35 323 revision firmware 134 RMS voltage 325 root mean square 325 rubber bumpers removing 29 S SCPI command terminators 269 language overview 266 parameter types 270 SCPI command reference 147 SCPI command summary 149 SCPI status system 250 SCPI version 134 245 screen 4 displaying message 132 244 number format 133 screen blank 130 screen contrast 131 screen enable disable 132 243 screen saver mode 130 security calibration 141 self test 131 245 self test error messages 296 serial poll 254 service request SRQ 254 setting addre
218. key to edit any of the arbitrary waveforms stored in non volatile memory or the waveform currently stored in volatile memory While editing an existing waveform please note the following interactions e Ifyou increase the cycle period some points could potentially match existing points The waveform editor will preserve the earliest points and remove all duplicates e If you decrease the cycle period the waveform editor will remove all points that were previously defined beyond the new period e If you increase the voltage limits there will be no change in the voltage levels of any existing points but there may be some loss of vertical resolution e Ifyou decreasethe voltage limits some of the existing points could potentially exceed the new limits The waveform editor will reduce the voltage levels of such points to equal the new limits If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape for AM FM PM or PWM the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 125 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations System Related Operations This section gives information on topics such as instrument state storage power down recall error conditions self test and front panel display control This information is not directly related to waveform generation but is an important part of operating the function generator Instrument State Storage
219. l be generated If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed offset will drop in half SeetheouTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information e Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum offset and amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum offset is limited to 4 95 volts into 50 ohms 177 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands e You can also set the offset by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an associated offset voltage of 500 mV Seethe VOLT HIGH and VOLT LOW commands bel ow for more information e Tooutput a dc voltageleve select the dc voltage function using the FUNC Dc command and then set the offset voltage level using the VOLT OFFS command You can set the dc level to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into an open circuit VOLTage HIGH lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum HIGH MINimum MAXimum LOW lt voltage gt MINimum MAXimum LOW MINimum MAXimum Set the high or low voltage levels For all functions the default high levd is 50 mV and the default low levd is 50 mV MIN sel
220. l goes false Burst Mode Burst Count Burst Period Burst Phase Trigger Source BURS MODE BURS NCYC BURS INT PER BURS PHAS TRIG SOUR F TRIGgered Available Available Available IMMediate Internal Trigger Triggered Burst Mode Triggered Available Not Used Available EXTernal BUS External Trigger Gated Burst Mode GATed Not Used Not Used Available Not Used External Trigger 107 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode e When the gated mode is selected the burst count burst period and trigger source are ignored these parameters are used for the triggered burst mode only If a manual trigger is received it is ignored and no error will be generated e When the gated mode is selected you can also select the polarity of the signal on the rear panel Trig In connector e Front Pane Operation After enabling bursts press the N Cycle triggered or Gated softkey To select the polarity of the external gate signal on the TrigIn connector press the Polarity softkey The default polarity is POS true high logic e Remotelnterface Operation BURSt MODE TRIGgered GATed Use the following command to select the polarity of the external gate signal on the Trig In connector The default is NORM true high logic BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted 108 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Waveform Frequency The waveform frequency defines the repetition
221. lation limits 180 E edge time 189 definition 189 edge time pulse 24 73 end or identify message 269 EOI 269 error on phase unlock 249 error messages 273 errors 129 242 data out of range errors 287 settings conflict errors 278 arbitrary waveform errors 299 calibration errors 298 device dependent errors 293 execution errors 278 instrument errors 295 number allowed 242 query errors 294 self test errors 296 343 Index examples programming 301 exponential fall waveform 228 exponential rise waveform 228 external gated burst 107 external gated mode burst 216 external reference 248 external source AM 78 FM 84 FSK 92 PM 88 PWM 98 external trigger 117 213 221 224 external trigger source 118 119 F filters anti aliasing 313 firmware revision 134 floating point download 229 FM 79 carrier frequency 81 carrier waveform 80 deviation 329 DEViation command 195 frequency deviation 83 195 INTernal FREQuency command 195 FUNCtion 194 modulating frequency 82 195 modulating source 84 194 modulating waveform 82 modulation waveshape 194 overview 193 SOU Rce command 194 arbs command STATe command 196 tutorial description 327 FORMat BORDer command 232 FRE Quency CENTer command 211 SPAN command 211 STARt command 210 STOP command 210 frequency burst limitation 57 duty cycle limitations 57 174 front panel selection 17 function limitations 57 164 174 sweep time 102 FREQue
222. left corner of the display Set the start frequency Press the Start softkey and then set the value to 50 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Linear Sweep Internal Trigger 59 000 000 Hz WW F 3 Sweep Marker Log Center Span f 3 42 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Frequency Sweep 4 Set the stop frequency Press the Stop softkey and then set the valueto 5 kHz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Line ar Sweep Internal Trigger a 500 000 00 kHz E F g Sweep Marker Trigger Sp OFF setup Log i HEN At this point the function generator outputs a continuous sweep from 50 Hz to 5 kHz if the output is enabled Note If desired you can set the frequency boundaries of the sweep using a center frequency and frequency span These parameters are similar to the start frequency and stop frequency and are included to give you added flexibility To achieve the same results set the center frequency to 2 525 kHz and the frequency span to 4 950 kHz 5 View the waveform 5d UU O00 Hz You can generate a single frequency sweep by pressing the key For more information see To Trigger a Sweep or Burst on page 46 43 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Burst Waveform To Output a Burst Waveform You can configure the function generator to output a waveform with a specified number of cycles called a burst You can
223. liasing at higher frequencies the Agilent 33220A also uses a different waveform generation technique to create pulse waveforms For pulse waveform generation clock cycles are counted to derive both the period and the pulse width To achieve fine period resolution the clock frequency is varied from 95 to 100 MHz by a phase lock loop PLL circuit which also multiplies the incoming frequency from the DDS by five The rising and falling edge times are controlled by a circuit that varies the charging currents in a capacitor Period pulse width and edge time are controlled independently within certain limits The pulse waveform generation circuitry is represented in the following block diagram Period From DDS Counter fy 95 100 MHz Edge Time Leading Edge Circuit Counter Trailing Edge nS Pulse Waveform Generation Circuitry 319 Chapter 7 Tutorial Signal Imperfections 90 90 50 50 a Pulse Width EaR 10 10 4 cs Rise Time Fall Time Period Pulse Waveform Parameters Signal Imperfections For sine waveforms signal imperfections are easiest to describe and observe in the frequency domain using a spectrum analyzer Any component of the output signal which has a different frequency than the fundamental or carrier is considered to be spurious The signal imperfections can be categorized as harmonic non harmonic or phase noise and are specified in decibels relative
224. lid for this instrument Y ou may have misspelled the command or it may not be a valid command If you are using the short form of the command make sure that it is correctly abbreviated Example TRIGG SOUR BUS Exponent too large A numeric parameter was found whose exponent was larger than 32 759 Example BURS NCYCL 1E34000 Too many digits A numeric parameter was found whose mantissa contained more than 255 digits excluding leading zeros Numeric data not allowed A numeric parameter was received but a character string was expected Example DISP TEXT 123 Invalid suffix A suffix was incorrectly specified for anumeric parameter You may have misspelled the suffix Example SWE TIME 0 5 SECS Suffix not allowed A suffix is not supported for this command Example BURS NCYC 12 CYC Character data not allowed A discrete parameter was received but a character string or numeric parameter was expected Check the list of parameters to verify that you have used a valid parameter type Example DISP TEXT ON Invalid string data An invalid character string was received Check to see if you have enclosed the character string in quotation marks and verify that the string contains valid ASCII characters Example DISP TEXT TESTING the ending quote is missing 276 158 161 168 170 to 178 Chapter 5 Error Messages Command Errors String data not allowed A character string was received but is not allowed for this command C
225. lowing steps show you how to configure a 500 ms pulse waveform with a pulse width of 10 ms and edge times of 50 ns Select the pulse function Press the s2 key to select the pulse function and output a pulse waveform with the default parameters Set the pulse period Press the Period softkey and then set the pulse period to 500 ms 500 000 00ms ZA eq EIR Edge Pericc 9m Be ees ee E Set the pulse width Press the Width softkey and then set the pulse width to 10 ms The pulse width represents the time from the 50 threshold of the rising edge to the 50 threshold of the next falling edge note the display icon 000 00ms FE Period ee E ees E Set the edge time for both edges Press the Edge Time softkey and then set the edge time for both the rising and falling edges to 50 ns The edge time represents the time from the 10 threshold to the 90 threshold of each edge note the display icon 9 0 ns AX eq Eis Edge Period ae ee aes E 24 Chapter 1 Quick Start To View a Waveform Graph To View a Waveform Graph In the Graph Mode you can view a graphical representation of the current waveform parameters The softkeys are listed in the same order as in the normal display mode and they perform the same functions However only one label for example Freq or Period is displayed for each softkey at one time Enable the Graph Mode Grae key to enable the Graph Mode The name of the cu
226. lt is 10 Hz Front Pand Operation After enabling PM press the PM Freq softkey Remote Interface Operation PM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 87 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Phase Modulation PM Phase Deviation The phase deviation setting represents the peak variation in phase of the modulated waveform from the carrier waveform The phase deviation can be set from 0 to 360 degrees The default is 180 degrees e Front Pand Operation After enabling PM press the Phase Dev softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired deviation e Remotelnterface Operation PM DEViation lt deviation in degrees MINimum MAXimum Modulating Source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PM e Modulating source Internal or External The default is Internal e If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The phase deviation is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 180 degrees then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degree phase shift Lower external signal levels produce less deviation Modulation In 5 V OV 5 V e Front Pand Operation After enabling PM press the Source softkey e Remotelnterface Operation PM SOURce INTernal EXTernal 88 Chapter 3 Features a
227. mand 243 LRN command 245 OPC command 213 222 246 263 OPC command 213 222 246 PSC command 263 RCL command 239 RST command 244 SAV command 238 SRE command 260 STB command 254 260 TRG command 213 222 225 TST command 245 WAI command 213 222 246 A ac connector 6 address GPIB 48 135 136 Agilent Express 7 air flow 30 aliasing 315 AM 74 carrier frequency 75 carrier waveform 75 DEPTh command 192 front panel operation 36 INTernal FREQuency command 192 FUNCtion 191 modulating frequency 192 modulating source 78 191 command modulating waveform 76 modulation depth 77 328 modulation waveshape 191 overview 190 SOU Rce command 191 STATe command 192 tutorial description 327 amplitude 18 arb waveform 59 166 dBm limitations 175 high low level 176 load limitations 58 165 175 offset limitations 58 175 range hold 66 tutorial description 322 unit limitations 58 units 62 amplitude modulation 74 carrier frequency 75 carrier waveform 75 front panel operation 36 modulating frequency 192 modulating source 78 191 modulating waveform 76 modulation depth 77 328 modulation waveshape 191 overview 190 tutorial description 327 amplitude units converting 19 angle burst phase 221 angle phase burst 220 anti aliasing filters 313 application programs 301 APPLy DC command 170 NOISe command 170 limitations PULSe command 169 RAMP command 169 SINusoid command 169 SQUare command 169 US
228. me time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PM the sweep or burst mode is turned off Front Pand Operation You must enable PM before setting up any of the other modulation parameters Press ea and then select PM using the Type softkey The PM waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency modulating frequency output amplitude and offset voltage Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable PM after you have set up the other modulation parameters PM STATe OFF ON 85 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Phase Modulation PM Carrier Waveform Shape e PM carrier shape Sine Square Ramp or Arbitrary waveform Thedefault is Sine You cannot use pulse noise or dc as the carrier waveform e Front Pand Operation Press any of the front pane function keys except Puise For arbitrary waveforms press and then choose the Select Wform softkey to select the active waveform e Remotelnterface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Carrier Frequency The maximum carrier frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 wHz 20 MHz Ramp 1 wHz 200 kHz Arbs 1 wHz 6 MHz e Fron
229. mmable Instruments is an ASCI based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments Refer to Simplified Programming Overview starting on page 161 for an introduction to the basic techniques used to program the function generator over the remote interface SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as a treesystem In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subsystems A portion of the SOURce subsystem is shown below to illustrate the tree system SOURce FREQuency STARt lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum STARt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum STOP MINimum MAXimum SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic SPACing SWEep TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum TIME MINimum MAXimum SWEep STATe OFF ON STATe SOURce is the root keyword of the command FREQuency and SWEep are second level keywords and STARt and sToP are third level keywords A colon separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword 266 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language Command Format Used in This Manual The format used to show commands in this manual is illustrated below FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum The command syntax shows most commands and some parameters as a mixture of upper and lower case letters The upper case lette
230. mmand from a function that allows a higher frequency the function generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 6 MHz Settings conflict frequency changed for pulse function For pulse waveforms the output frequency is limited to 5 MHz When you change to the pulse function APPL PULS or FUNC PULS command from a function that allows a higher frequency the function generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 5 MHz Settings conflict frequency reduced for ramp function For ramp waveforms the output frequency is limited to 200 kHz When you change to the ramp function APPL RAMP or FUNC RAMP command from a function that allows a higher frequency the function generator will automatically adjust the frequency to 200 kHz Settings conflict frequency made compatible with burst mode For an internally triggered burst the output frequency is limited to a minimum of 2 001 mHz The function generator has adjusted the frequency to be compatible with the current settings Settings conflict burst turned off by selection of other mode or modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation sweep or burst mode to be enabled at the same time When you enable a modulation sweep or burst mode all other modes are turned off 280 221 221 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict FSK turned off by selection of other mode or modul
231. mmand returns 1 to the output buffer when the sweep or burst is complete The OPc command sets the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register when the sweep or burst is complete TRIGger Trigger a sweep or burst from the remote interface This command can be used with any of the available trigger sources TRIG SOUR command For example you can use the TRIG command to issue an immediate trigger while waiting for an external trigger TRG Trigger a sweep or burst from the remote interface only if the bus software trigger source is currently selected TRIG SOUR BUS command TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SLOPe Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling edge of the trigger signal on the rear panel Trig In connector The default is POS rising edge The SLOP query returns POS or NEG BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted BURSt GATE POLarity Select whether the function generator uses true high or true low logic levels on the rear panel Trig In connector for an externally gated burst The default is NORM true high logic The POL query returns NORM or INV 225 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Triggering Commands OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe Select a rising or falling edge for the trigger out signal When enabled using the OUTP TRIG command see below a TTL compat
232. mpatible levels and is referenced to chassis ground not floating ground When not used as an input the Trig In 332 Chapter 7 Tutorial Burst connector can be configured as an output to enable the 33220A to trigger other instruments at the same time as its internal trigger occurs Sync and Marker Signals The output from the front panel Sync connector goes high at the beginning of each sweep If you have disabled the Marker function the Sync signal goes low at the midpoint of the sweep However if you have enabled the Marker function the Sync signal goes low when the output frequency reaches the specified marker frequency The marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency You can use the Marker function to identify a notable frequency in the response of a device under test DUT for example you may want to identify a resonance To do this connect the Sync output to one channel of your oscilloscope and connect the DUT output to another channel Then trigger the oscilloscope with the rising edge of the Sync signal to position the start frequency on the left side of the screen Adjust the marker frequency until the falling edge of the Sync signal lines up with the interesting feature in the device s response You can then read the frequency from the front panel display of the 33220A Sync Output DUT Output Sweep with Marker at DUT Resonance Burst
233. ms the Sync signal is a square waveform with the same duty cycle as the main output The Sync signal is aTTL high when the waveforms output is positive relative to zero volts or the dc offset value The Sync signal is a TTL low when the output is negative relative to zero volts or the dc offset value e For arbitrary waveforms the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal is a TTL high when the first downloaded waveform point is output e For internally modulated AM FM PM and PWM the Sync signal is referenced to the modulating waveform not the carrier and is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal isa TTL high during the first half of the modulating waveform e For externally modulated AM FM PM and PWM the Sync signal is referenced to the carrier waveform not the modulating waveform and is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle 68 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration For FSK the Sync signal is referenced to the hop frequency The Sync signal isa TTL high on the transition to the hop frequency For frequency sweeps with Marker Off the Sync signal is a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle The Sync signal is a TTL high at the beginning of the sweep and goes low at the midpoint of the sweep The frequency of the sync waveform equals the specified sweep time For frequency sweeps with Marker On t
234. mum CENTer MINimum MAXimum SPAN lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum SPAN MINimum MAXimum SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic SPACing TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum TIME MINimum MAXimum SWEep STATe OFF ON SWEep STATe TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS TRIGger SOURce TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig In Connector TRIGger SLOPe OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig Out Connector TRIGger SLOPe TRIGger OFF ON TRIGger MARKer FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum MARKER FREQuency MINimum MAXimum MARKer OFF ON MARKer Parameters shown in bold aresedected following a RST reset command 154 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference SCPI Command Summary Burst Commands see page 216 for more information BURSt MODE TRIGgered GATed BURSt MODE BURSt NCYCles lt cyde6 gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum BURSt NCYCles MINimum MAXimum BURSt INTernal PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum BURSt INTernal PERiod MINimum MAXimum BURSt PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum BURSt PHASe MINimum MAXimum BURSt STATe OFF ON BURSt STATe UNIT ANGLe DEGree RADian UNIT ANGLe TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS Triggered Burst TRIGger SOURCe TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative Trig In Connector TRIGger SLOPe BURSt GATE POLarity NORMal INVerted External Gated Burst BURSt
235. n FSKey INTernal RATE lt ratein Hz gt MINimum MAXimum 91 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation FSK Source FSK source Internal or External The default is Internal When the Internal source is selected the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and hop frequency is determined by the FSK rate specified When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output The maximum external FSK rate is 100 kHz Note that the connector used for externally controlled FSK waveforms Trig In is not the same connector that is used for externally modulated AM FM PM and PWM waveforms Modulation In When used for FSK the Trig In connector does not have adjustable edge polarity Front Pand Operation After enabling FSK press the Source softkey Remote Interface Operation FSKey SOURce INTernal EXTernal 92 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Pulse Width Modulation PWM In Pulse Width Modulation PWM the width of a pulse waveform is varied by the instantaneous voltage of the modulating waveform The width of the pulse can be expressed either as a pulse width expressed in time units like the period or a
236. n be reported to the Standard Event summary bit through the enable register To set the enable register mask you must write a decimal value to the register using the ESE command Bit Definitions Standard Event Register Decimal Bit Number Value Definition 0 Operation Complete 1 All commands prior to and including OPC have completed and the overlapped command e g TRG for burst has completed 1 Not Used 2 Not Used Returns 0 2 Query Error 4 The instrument tried to read the output buffer but it was empty Or a new command line was received before a previous query has been read Or both the input and output buffers are full 3 Device Error 8 A self test cal or other device specific error has occurred see chapter 5 4 Execution Error 16 An execution error has occurred see chapter 5 5 Command Error 32 A command syntax error has occurred see chapter 5 6 Not Used 64 Not Used Returns 0 7 Power On 128 Power has been cycled on since the last time the event register was read or cleared 258 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The Standard event register is cleared when e You execute the CLS command e You query the event register using the ESR command The Standard Event enable register is cleared when e You execute the ESE 0 command e You turn the power on and have previously configured the function generator to clear the enable regist
237. n connector for an externally triggered sweep The default is POS rising edge The SLOP query returns POS or NEG OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe Select a rising or falling edge for the trigger out signal When enabled using the OUTP TRIG command see below a TTL compatible square waveform with the specified edge is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep Select POS to output a pulse with a rising edge or select NEG to output a pulse with a falling edge The default is POS The SLOP query returns POS or NEG e When the Immediate internal trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle the rising edge is the sweep trigger from the Trig Out connector The period of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time SWE TIME command e When the External trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR EXT command the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The rear panel Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered sweep uses the same connector to trigger the sweep e When the Bus software trigger source is selected TRIG SOUR BUS command the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 us pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep OU
238. n parameters use the PWM STAT ON command to enable PWM 203 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands PWM Commands Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to configure the carrier waveform PWM SOURce INTernal EXTernal PWM SOURCe Select the source of the modulating signal The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT e If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The pulse width or pulse duty cycle deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the pulse width deviation to 50 us using the PWM DEV command then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 50 us width increase Lower external signal levels produce less deviation PWM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PWM SOUR INT command The carrier must be a pulse waveform for PWM The default is SIN The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRL NOIS or USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle U e Select RAMP for a ramp wa
239. nce Burst Mode Commands BURSt NCYCles lt cycles gt INFinity MINimum MAXimum BURSt NCYCles MINimum MAXimum Set the number of cycles to be output per burst triggered burst modeonly Select from 1 cycle to 50 000 cycles in 1 cycle increments see the restrictions bd ow The default is 1 cycle MIN 1 cycle MAX based on the burst period and frequency as shown below Select INF to generatea continuous burst waveform The Ncyc query returns the burst count from 1 to 50 000 or 9 9E 37 for an infinite count e Ifthelmmediatetrigger source is selected TRIG SOUR IMM command the burst count must be less than the product of the maximum burst period and the waveform frequency as shown below Burst Count lt Maximum Burst Period X Waveform Frequency e The function generator will automatically increase the burst period up to its maximum value to accommodate the specified burst count but the waveform frequency will not be changed From the remote interface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the burst period will be adjusted as described e For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count e When the gated burst mode is selected the burst count is ignored However if you change the burst count while in the gated mode the function generator remembers the new count and will use it when the triggered mode is selected 219 Chapte
240. nction generator over the remote interface You can select the function frequency amplitude and offset all in one command as shown in the syntax statement below APPLy lt function gt lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offsa gt For example the following command string sent from your computer will output a 3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a 2 5 volt offset APPL SIN 5 KHZ 3 0 VPP 2 5 V The APPLy command performs the following operations e Sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to sending the TRIG SOUR IMM command e Turns off any modulation sweep or burst mode currently enabled and places the instrument in the continuous waveform mode e Turns on the Output connector OUTP ON command but does not change the output termination setting OUTP LOAD command e Overrides the voltage autorange setting and automatically enables autoranging VOLT RANG AUTO command e For square waveforms overrides the current duty cycle setting and automatically selects 50 FUNC SQU DCYC command For ramp waveforms overrides the current symmetry setting and automatically selects 100 FUNC RAMP SYMM command The syntax statements for the APPLy command are shown on page 168 163 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command Output Frequency e For the frequency parameter of the APPLy command the output frequency range depends on the function specified You can substitut
241. ncy command 174 frequency deviation FM 83 195 329 frequency modulation carrier frequency 81 carrier waveform 80 deviation 329 frequency deviation 83 195 modulating frequency 82 195 modulating source 84 194 modulating waveform 82 modulation waveshape 194 overview 193 tutorial description 327 frequency span sweep 211 frequency sweep 99 332 center frequency 101 211 external trigger source 118 frequency span 101 211 front panel operation 40 42 linear vs logarithmic 102 212 332 marker frequency 103 215 overview 208 spacing 102 start frequency 100 stop frequency 100 210 sweep time 212 Sync signal 100 trigger out signal 105 trigger output 119 trigger source 104 frequency sweeps Sync signal 101 FRE Quency command 174 frequency shift keying See FSK 38 front panel connectors 3 creating arb waveforms 120 display overview 4 number entry 5 overview 3 front panel display enable disable 132 243 number format 133 front panel configuration LAN 49 front panel menu quick reference 33 front panel menu operation 31 front panel selection 18 344 Index FSK 89 carrier frequency 90 front panel operation 38 FSK rate 39 91 hop frequency 38 91 202 modulating source 92 201 modulating waveform 90 overview 200 SOU Rce command 201 tutorial description 327 FSK rate 39 FSKey FREQuency command 202 INTernal RATE command 202 STATe command 202 FUNCtion PULSe DCY Cle command 188 H
242. ncy that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 12 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 the upper limit for this frequency From theremoteinterface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the duty cycle will be adjusted as described 174 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands VOLTage lt amplitude gt MINimum MAXimum VOLTage MINimum MAXimum Set the output amplitude The default amplitude is 100 mV pp into 50Q for all functions MIN selects the smallest amplitude 10 mVpp into 509 MAX selects the largest amplitude for the selected function at most 10 Vpp into 50Q depending on the selected function and offset voltage The VOLT query returns the output amplitude for the function currently selected Values are always returned in the units set by the most recent VOLT UNIT command e Offset Voltage Limitations The output amplitude and offset are related to Vmax as shown below Voffset Vpp 2 lt Vmax where Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load The new amplitude specified in the voLT command will be set but the offset voltage may be reduced accordingly and a Setti
243. nd Functions Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation F requency Shift Keying FSK Modulation You can configure the function generator to shift its output frequency between two preset values using FSK modulation The rate at which the output shifts between the two frequencies called the carrier frequency and the hop frequency is determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector For moreinformation on the fundamentals of FSK Modulation refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select FSK Modulation The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FSK and AM at the same time When you enable FSK the previous modulation mode is turned off The function generator will not allow FSK to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable F SK the sweep or burst mode is turned off Front Pand Operation You must enable FSK beforesetting up any of the other modulation parameters Press os and then select FSK using the Type softkey The FSK waveform is output using the present settings for the carrier frequency output amplitude and offset voltage Remote Interface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable FSK after you have set up the other modulation parameters FSKey STATe OFF ON 89 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Shift Keying FS
244. nd is typically used to clear all memory before removing the instrument from a secure area This command is not recommended for use in routine applications because of the possibility of unintended loss of data LRN Query the function generator and return a string of SCP commands containing the current settings learn string You can then send the string back to the instrument to restore this state at a later time For proper operation do not modify the returned string before sending it to the function generator The returned string will contain about 1 500 characters To avoid possible instrument errors execute the RST command first before sending the learn string to the instrument OPC Set the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register after all of the previous commands have been completed Other commands may be executed before the bit is set This command is used in the triggered sweep or triggered burst modes to provide a way to poll or interrupt the computer when the TRG command is complete OPC Return 1 to the output buffer after the previous commands have been completed Other commands cannot be executed until this command completes WAI Wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands over the interface 246 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Interface Configuration Commands Interface Configuration Commands Se also Remote nterf
245. ne the remaining waveform points Using the Time and Voltage softkeys define the remaining waveform points using the values shown in the table below Point Time Value Voltage Value j Os OV 2 2ms 3V 3 4 ms 1V 4 7 ms OV The time value of the last point that can be defined in the waveform must be less than the specified cycle period e The waveform editor automatically connects the last waveform point to the voltage level of first point to create a continuous waveform e Toinsert additional points after the current waveform point press the Insert Point softkey The new point is inserted midway between the current point and the next defined point e Toremove the current waveform point press the Remove Point softkey The remaining points are joined using the interpolation method currently selected You cannot remove Point 1 since the waveform must have a defined initial value 123 11 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms Store the arbitrary waveform in memory Press the End Store softkey to store the new waveform in memory Then press the DONE softkey to store the waveform in volatile memory or press the Store in Non Vol softkey to store the waveform in one of four non volatile memory locations You can assign a custom name to the four non volatile memory locations e The custom name can contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remain
246. nel the starting phase is always displayed in degrees radians are not available If you set the starting phase in radians from the remote interface and then return to front panel operation you will see that the function generator converts the phase to degrees For sine square and ramp waveforms 0 degrees is the point at which the waveform crosses zero volts or the dc offset value in a positive going direction For arbitrary waveforms 0 degrees is the first waveform point downloaded to memory The burst phase has no effect on pulse or noise waveforms The burst phase is also used in the gated burst mode When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops The output will remain at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase Front Pand Operation Toset the burst phase press the Start Phase softkey and then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired phase in degrees Remote Interface Operation BURSt PHASe lt angle gt MINimum MAXimum 112 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Trigger Source In the triggered burst mode the function generator outputs a burst with the specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received After the specified number of cycles have been output the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger At power on theinternally triggered burst modeis enabled e Burst
247. nfiguring your interface The programs listed in this chapter are protected by copyright Copyright 2003 Agilent Technologies Inc You have a royalty free right to use modify reproduce and distribute the Sample Application Files and or any modified version in any way you find useful provided that you agree that Agilent has no warranty obligations or liability for any Sample Application Files Agilent Technologies provides programming examples for illustration only All sample programs assume that you are familiar with the programming language being demonstrated and the tools used to create and debug procedures Agilent support engineers can help explain the functionality of Agilent software components and associated commands but they will not modify these samples to provide added functionality or construct procedures to meet your specific needs All of the sample application programs in this chapter are example programs intended for use with Microsoft Visual Basic 6 0 and the Agilent VISA COM objects To use thel0O object in another Visual Basic project 1 Set the reference to include the libraries in the Project References menu e VISA COM 1 0 Type Library corresponds to VISACOM tlb e Agilent VISA COM Resource Manager 1 0 corresponds to AgtRM DLL e VISA COM 488 2 Formatted I O 1 0 corresponds to the BasicF ormatted O dll 2 Create the formatted I O reference with a statement such as Dim Fgen
248. ng FREQuency STARt 100 Start frequency is 100 Hz WriteString FREQuency STOP 20e3 Stop frequency is 20 kHz Frequency sweep limits may also be set as FREQuency CENTer and FREQuency SPAN on the 33250A For the 33250A also see MARKer FREQuency WriteString OUTPut ON Turn on the instrument output WriteString SWEep STATe ON Turn sweep on End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 306 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example A Pulse Waveform This program found in the E xamples chapter6 Pulse subdirectory on the CD ROM configures a pulse waveform setting pulse width period and high low levels The edge time is then incremented Private Declare Sub Sleep Lib kernel32 ByVal dwMilliseconds As Long Private Sub cmdPulse Click Dim io mgr As VisaComLib ResourceManager Dim Fgen As VisaComLib FormattedI0488 Set io_mgr New AgilentRMLib SRMCls Set Fgen New VisaComLib Formatted1I0488 Set Fgen IO io _mgr Open txtIO Text Dim I As Integer On Error GoTo MyError This program sets up a pulse waveshape and adjusts the edge time It also shows the use of high and low voltage levels and period The edge time is adjusted by 5 nsec increments With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors and status registers WriteString FUNCtion PULSe Select pulse waveshape WriteString
249. nge when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front pand operation Press viy and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary Then select Subnet Mask e There is noSCPI command to set a subnet mask 137 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration Default Gateway LAN A gateway is a network device that provides a connection between networks The default gateway setting is the IP address of such a device You need not set a gateway address if DHCP is in use Contact your network administrator to find out whether a gateway is being used and for the address Enter the gateway address using the numeric keypad not the knob The gateway address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset Front pand operation Press vwy and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary Then select Default Gateway There is no SCPI command to set a gateway address Host Name LAN A host name is the host portion of the domain name which is translated into an IP address Contact your network administrator for the correct host name Enter the host name using the knob and cursor keys Each character in the name can be a letter a through z number or dash _ e Usethe kno
250. ngs conflict error generated e Limits Dueto Output Termination If you change the output termination setting the displayed output amplitude will be automatically adjusted and no error will be generated F or example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will doubleto 20 Vpp If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half For moreinformation seethe OUTP LOAD command on page 182 e You can set the output amplitude in Vpp Vrms or dBm by specifying the units as part of the VOLT command as shown below VOLT 3 0 VRMS Or you can use the VOLT UNIT command see page 184 to specify the output units for all commands that follow e You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp Seethe VOLT UNIT command on page 184 for more information 175 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands e Limits Dueto Units Selection In some cases the amplitude limits are determined by the output units selected This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wa
251. ning the same name to different storage locations For example you can assign the same name to locations 1 and 2 MEMory STATe DELete 0 1 2 3 4 Delete the contents of the specified storage location If you have assigned a user defined name to a location MEM STAT NAME command this command also removes the name that you assigned and restores the default name AUTO RECALL STATE_1 STATE _2 etc Note that you cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location that is empty An error is generated if you attempt to recall a deleted state 240 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference State Storage Commands MEMory STATe RECall AUTO OFF ON MEMory STATe RECall1 AUTO Disable or enable the automatic recall of the power down state from storage location 0 when power is turned on Select ON to automatically recall the power down state when power is turned on Select OFF default to issue a reset RST Command when power is turned on state O is not automatically recalled The AUTO query returns O OFF or 1 ON MEMory STATe VALid 0 1 2 3 4 Query the specified storage location to determine if a valid state is currently stored in that location You can use this command before sending the RCL command to determine if a state has been previously stored in this location Returns 0 if no state has been stored or if it has been deleted Returns 1
252. ns the same result as a Serial Poll but bit 6 is not cleared as long as the enabled conditions remain The STB command is not handled automatically by the E E E 488 bus interface hardware and will be executed only after previous commands have completed You cannot clear an SRQ using the STB command 254 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System Using the Message Available Bit MAV You can use the Status Byte Message Available bit bit 4 to determine when data is available to read into your computer The instrument subsequently clears bit 4 only after all messages have been read from the output buffer To Interrupt Your Computer Using SRQ 1 4 5 Send a Device Clear message to return the function generator to a responsive state and clear it s output buffer e g CLEAR 710 Clear the event registers and error queue using the CLS command Set up the enable register masks Use the ESE command to configure the Standard Event enable register and the SRE command to configure the Status Byte enable register Send the opc command and read the result to ensure synchronization Enable your computer s EEE 488 SRQ interrupt To Determine When a Command Sequence is Completed 1 Send a Device Clear message to return the function generator to a responsive state and clear it s output buffer e g CLEAR 710 Clear the event registers and error queue using the CLS command Enabl
253. nstrument is ready for use it displays a message about how to obtain help along with the current GPIB address and USB identification string The function generator powers up in the sine wave function at 1 kHz with an amplitude of 100 mV peak to peak into a 50Q termination At power on the Output connector is disabled To enable the Output connector press the key If the function generator does not turn on verify that the power cord is firmly connected to the power receptacle on the rear panel the power line voltage is automatically sensed at power on You should also make sure that the function generator is connected to a power source that is energized Then verify that the function generator is turned on If the power on self test fails Self Test Failed is displayed along with an error code See the Agilent 33220A Service Guide for information on error codes and for instructions on returning the function generator to Agilent for service 15 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Adjust the Carrying Handle To Adjust the Carrying Handle To adjust the position grasp the handle by the sides and pull outward Then rotate the handle to the desired position LA Retracted Carrying Position Extended 16 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the Output Frequency To Set the Output Frequency At power on the function generator outputs a sine wave at 1 kHz with an amplitude of 100 mV peak to peak into a 50Q
254. nts are removed using decimation 194 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Modulation FM Commands FM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FM INTernal FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected FM SOUR INT command Select from 2 mHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 20 kHz The FREQ query returns theinternal modulating frequency in hertz FM DEViation lt peak deviation in Hz gt MINimum MAXimum FM DEViation MINimum MAXimum Set the peak frequency deviation in hertz This value represents the peak variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier frequency Select any value from 1 wHz to 10 05 MHz limited to 150 kHz for ramps and 3 05 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 100 Hz MIN 1uHz MAX based on the frequency of the carrier waveform as shown below The DEV query returns the deviation in hertz Max Deviation carie For Carrie lt 10 MHz Max Deviation Max Lreguency sarder For Carrie gt 10 MHz e The carrie frequency must always be greater than or equal to the deviation If you attempt to set the deviation to a value greater than the carrier frequency with FM enabled the function generator will automatically adjust the deviation to the maximum value allowed with the present carrier frequency From the remote interface a Data out of ran
255. ntuiLink Please see the online help included with the Agilent IntuiLink software for further information For most applications it is not necessary to create an arbitrary waveform with a specific number of points since the function generator will repeat points or interpolate as necessary to fill waveform memory For example if you specify 100 points each waveform point will be repeated an average of 16 384 100 or 163 84 times For the 33220A you do not have to change the length of the waveform to change its output frequency All you have to dois create a waveform of any length and then adjust the function generator s output frequency However in order to get the best results and minimize voltage quantization errors it is recommended that you use the full range of the waveform DAC When entering waveform points from the function generator s front panel you are not required to enter the points at evenly spaced intervals in time You can always add additional points as needed where the waveform is more complex From the front panel only you can also use linear interpolation to smooth the transition between waveform points These features make it possible to create useful arbitrary waveforms using a relatively small number of points With the 33220A you can output an arbitrary waveform to an upper frequency limit of 6 MHz However note that the useful upper limit is usually less due to the function generator s bandwidth limitation
256. o effect on the noise output but the value is remembered when you change to a different function The following statement shows the use of the APPLy command for noise APPL NOIS DEF 5 0 2 0 APPLy DC lt frequency DEFault gt lt amplitude gt DEFault gt lt offsd gt Output a dc voltage with the level specified by the offset parameter You can set the dc voltage to any value between 5 Vdc into 50 ohms or 10 Vdc into an open circuit The dc voltage is output as soon as the command is executed e The frequency and amplitude parameters have no effect for this command but you must specify a value or DEF ault If you specify a frequency and amplitude they have no effect on the dc output but the values are remembered when you change to a different function The following statement shows the use of the APPLy command for a dc output APPL DC DEF DEF 2 5 APPLy USER lt frequency gt lt amplitude gt lt offsd gt Output the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC USER command The waveform is output using the specified frequency amplitude and dc offset The waveform is output as soon as the command is executed See page 227 for moreinformation on downloading arbitrary waveforms to memory 170 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command APPLy Query the function generator s current configuration and return a quoted string The purpose of this command is to allow you
257. o separate a parameter froma command keyword If a command requires more than one parameter you must separate adjacent parameters using a comma as shown below APPL SIN 5 KHZ 3 0 VPP 2 5 V A senicolon is used to separate commands within the same subsystem and can also minimize typing F or example sending the following command string FREQ START 10 STOP 1000 ls the same as sending the following two commands FREQ START 10 FREQ STOP 1000 Use a colon and a semicolon to link commands from different subsystems For example in the following command string an error is generated if you do not use both the colon and semicolon SWE STAT ON TRIG SOUR EXT Using the MIN and MAX Parameters You can substitute M I Nimum or MAXimum in place of a parameter for many commands F or example consider the following commana FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum Instead of selecting a specific frequency you can substitute MIN to set the frequency to its minimum value or MAX to set the frequency toits maximum value 268 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language Querying Parameter Settings You can query the current value of most parameters by adding a question mark to the command For example the following command sets the output frequency to 5 kHz FREQ 5000 You can then query the frequency value by executing FREQ You can also quer
258. o the leading zeros 52 Features and Functions Features and Functions This chapter makes it easy to look up all the details about a particular feature of the function generator It covers both front panel and remote interface operation You may want to read chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation first See chapter 4 Remote nterface Reference for a detailed discussion of the syntax of the SCPI commands to program the function generator This chapter is divided into the following sections e Output Configuration on page 55 e Pulse Waveforms on page 70 e Amplitude Modulation AM on page 74 e Frequency Modulation FM on page 79 e Phase Modulation PM on page 85 e Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation on page 89 e Pulse Width Modulation PWM on page 93 e Frequency Sweep on page 99 e Burst Mode on page 106 e Triggering on page 115 e Arbitrary Waveforms on page 120 e System Related Operations on page 126 e Remote Interface Configuration on page 135 e Calibration Overview on page 141 e Factory Default Settings on page 145 Throughout this manual default states and values are identified These are the power on default states provided you have not enabled the power down recall mode see Instrument State Storage on page 126 Throughout this manual the following conventions are used for SCPI command syntax for remote interface programming e Square bracke
259. odulation The pulse may also be configured in time units pulse width and deviation rather than duty cycle if preferred With Fgen WriteString RST Reset the function generator 10 Clear Clear errors amp status registers WriteString OUTPut LOAD 50 WriteString FUNCtion SHAPe PULSe WriteString FREQuency 5000 WriteString VOLTage LOW 0 WriteString VOLTage HIGH 5 WriteString FUNCtion PULSe DCYCle 35 Begin with 35 duty cycle WriteString PWM INTernal FUNCtion TRIangle Modulating waveshape is triangle Modulation frequency is 2 Hz Modulation depth is 15 Use internal signal for modulation If using an external signal for PWM connect the signal to the rear panel BNC and use the command PWM SOURce EXTernal Output termination is 50 Ohms Carrier waveshape is pulse Carrier frequency is 5 kHz Set parameters to 5 V TTL WriteString PWM INTernal FREQuency 2 WriteString PWM DEViation DCYCle 15 WriteString PWM SOURce INTernal WriteString PWM STATe ON Turn PWM modulation on WriteString OUTPut ON Turn on the instrument output End With Exit Sub MyError txtError Err Description amp vbCrLf Resume Next End Sub 308 Chapter 6 Application Programs Program Listings Example Downloading an Arbitrary Waveform ASCII This program found in the E xamples chapter 6 ASCII arb subdirectory on the CD ROM downloads an arbitrary waveform to the function gener
260. oll through the list press the T or J softkey or rotate the knob Select the third topic Get HELP on any key and then press SELECT DONE Press DONE to exit Help 4 View the help information for displayed messages Whenever a limit is exceeded or any other invalid configuration is found the function generator will display a message For example if you enter a value that exceeds the frequency limit for the selected function a message will be displayed The built in help system provides additional information on the most recent message to be displayed eP key select the first topic View thelast message displayed and then press SELECT DONE Press DONE to exit Help Local Language Help The built in help system in available in multiple languages All messages context sensitive help and help topics appear in the selected language The menu softkey labels and status line messages are not translated To select the local language press the Ws key press the System softkey and then press the Help In softkey Select the desired language 28 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Rack Mount the Function Generator To Rack Mount the Function Generator You can mount the Agilent 33220A in a standard 19 inch rack cabinet using one of two optional kits available Instructions and mounting hardware are included with each rack mounting kit Any Agilent System II instrument of the same size can be r
261. on Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by that organiza tion s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other Interna tional Standards Organization members Warranty The material contained in this document is provided as is and is subject to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the maximum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent disclaims all warranties either express or implied with regard to this manual and any information contained herein including but not limited to the implied warranties of mer chantability and fitness for a particular purpose Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing use or performance of this document or any information contained herein Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms the warranty terms in the separate agreement will control Technologies Licenses The hardware and or software described in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with th
262. on To Store the Instrument State To Store the Instrument State You can store the instrument state in one of four non volatile storage locations A fifth storage location automatically holds the power down configuration of the instrument When power is restored the instrument can automatically return to its state before power down Select the desired storage location Select a custom name for the selected location If desired you can assign a custom name to each of the four locations CANCEL e Thenamecan contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter but the remaining characters can be letters numbers or the underscore character _ e Toadd additional characters press the right cursor key until the cursor is to the right of the existing name and then turn the knob e Todeleteall characters tothe right of the cursor position press e Touse numbers in the name you can enter them directly from the numeric keypad Use the decimal point from the numeric keypad to add the underscore character _ to the name Store the instrument state Press the STORE STATE softkey The instrument stores the selected function frequency amplitude dc offset duty cycle symmetry as well as any modulation parameters in use The instrument does not store volatile waveforms created in the arbitrary waveform function 47 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Configure the Remote Interfac
263. ontains reference information to help you program the function generator over the remote interface Error Messages Chapter 5 lists the error messages that may appear as you are working with the function generator Each listing contains information to help you diagnose and solve the problem Application Programs Chapter 6 contains several remote interface application programs to help you develop programs for your application Tutorial Chapter 7 discusses the fundamentals of signal generation and modulation techniques Specifications Chapter 8 lists the function generator s specifications You can contact Agilent Technologies at one of the following telephone numbers for warranty service or technical support information In the United States 800 829 4444 In Europe 3120547 2111 Inj apan 0120 421 345 Or use our Web link for information on contacting Agilent worldwide www agilent com find assist Or contact your Agilent Technologies Representative Contents Chapter 1 Quick Start 13 To Prepare the Function Generator for Use 15 To Adjust the Carrying Handle 16 To Set the Output Frequency 17 To Set the Output Amplitude 18 To Set a DC Offset Voltage 20 To Set the High Level and Low Level Values 21 To Select DC Volts 22 To Set the Duty Cycle of a Square Wave 23 To Configure a Pulse Waveform 24 To View a Waveform Graph 25 To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform 26 To Use the Built In Help System
264. operation 31 message calibration 144 265 message available MAV 255 messages error 273 modulation 36 89 AM 74 FM 79 FSK 89 PM 85 PWM 93 tutorial description 327 modulation depth AM 77 192 328 modulation modulation 36 Modulation In connector 78 84 depth percent 92 98 modulation source name arbitrary waveforms 124 defaults for stored states 240 stored states 127 240 naming stored states front panel operation 47 narrowband FM 329 n cycle burst 333 negative ramp waveform 228 negative trigger slope 214 222 225 new line 269 noise 170 number entry 5 number keypad 5 number of cycles burst 219 number of errors allowed 242 numeric entry 5 nyquist sampling theorem 315 346 Index 0 offset amplitude limitations 60 167 177 arb waveform limitations 61 167 177 front panel selection 20 load limitations 60 167 177 operation complete 246 OUTPut TRI Gger SLOPe command 214 223 226 TRI Gger command 214 223 226 output connector 66 enable disable 66 181 polarity 67 output amplitude arb waveform limitations 59 166 176 dBm limitations 175 front panel selection 18 high low level 176 load limitations 58 165 175 offset limitations 58 175 range hold 66 tutorial description 322 unit limitations 58 units 62 OUTPut command 181 Output connector 181 output frequency burst limitations 57 duty cycle limitations 57 174 front panel selection 17 function limitations 57 164 17
265. or any instrument on the interface bus and then select the GPIB Address e Front Pand Operation Press utiy softkey from the I O menu e Thereis noSCPI command to set the GPIB address DHCP On Off LAN DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol is a protocol for automatically assigning a dynamic IP address to a device on a network DHCP is typically the easiest way to configure your Agilent 33220A for remote communication using the LAN interface DHCP is On by default e Select DHCP On to use DHCP to automatically assign an IP address e Select DHCP Off if you want to manually assign an IP address using the IP Address softkey e Ifthe DHCP server fails to assign a valid IP address the currently configured IP Address setting will be used e The DHCP setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front pand operation Press vuy and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Press the DHCP On Off softkey to toggle its state e There is noSCPI command to set DHCP On Off Note If you change any LAN settings you must cycle the power to activate the new settings This is true for all LAN settings including turning DHCP on or off 136 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration IP Address LAN You can enter an IP address for the Agilent 33220A as a four byte intege
266. or will not allow PWM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PWM the sweep or burst mode is turned off e PWM is allowed only when pulse is the selected function 207 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands Frequency Sweep Commands See also Frequency Sweep starting on page 99 in chapter 3 Sweep Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to generate a sweep The commands used for sweep are listed on page 210 Select the waveform shape amplitude and offset Use the APPLy command or the equivalent FUNC FREQ VOLT and VOLT OFFS commands to select the function frequency amplitude and offset You can select a sine square ramp or arbitrary waveform pulse noise and dc are not allowed Select the frequency boundaries of the sweep You can set the frequency boundaries using one of two methods a Start Frequency Stop Frequency Use the FREQ STAR command to set the start frequency and the FREQ STOP command to set the stop frequency To sweep up in frequency set the start frequency lt stop frequency To sweep down in frequency set the start frequency gt stop frequency b Center Frequency Frequency Span Usethe FREQ CENT command to set the center frequency and the FREQ SPAN command to set the frequency span To sweep up in frequency set a positive span To sweep down in frequency set a negative span Select th
267. ored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the function generator responds with No error e The error queue is cleared by the cLs clear status command or when the power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the error queue The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset RST command e Front Paned Operation Press 2 and then select the topic entitled View the remote command error queue topic number 2 Then press the SELECT softkey to view the errors in the error queue As shown below the first error in the list i e the error at the top of the list is the first error that was generated DONE e Remotelnterface Operation SYSTem ERRor Reads one eror from the error queue Errors have the following format the error string may contain up to 255 characters 113 Undefined header Note Some error numbers can have several causes The descriptive string begins with a fixed portion that is common to all errors with the same number In many cases additional situation deoendent information appears after a semicolon 5 For example there areseveral causes for error 221 Hereis an example 221 Settings conflict burst count reduced 274 101 102 103 105 108 109 Chapter 5 Error Messages Command Errors Command Errors Invalid character An invalid character was found in the command strin
268. orial Modulation Amplitude Modulation AM The function generator implements a form of AM called double sideband transmitted carrier This is thetype of modulation used by most AM radio stations Modulating Signal Modulated Carrier 100 depth shown Amplitude M odulation The amount of amplitude modulation is called the modulation depth which refers to the portion of the amplitude range that will be used by the modulation For example a depth setting of 80 causes the amplitude to vary from 10 to 90 of the amplitude setting 90 10 80 with either an internal or a full scale 45V external modulating signal 328 Chapter 7 Tutorial Modulation Frequency Modulation FM For FM the function generator uses modulation samples to modify the output frequency of the instrument by changing the content of the PIR see Direct Digital Synthesis on page 313 Note that since the rear pane l Modulation In connector is dc coupled you can use the 33220A to emulate a voltage controlled oscillator VCO The variation in frequency of the modulated waveform from the carrier frequency is called the frequency deviation Waveforms with frequency deviations less than 1 of the modulating signal s bandwidth are referred to as narrowband FM Waveforms with larger deviations are referred to as wideband FM The bandwidth of the modulated signal can be approximated by the following equations BW 2 x
269. orm and enable PWM the Dty Cyc Dev softkey is available 97 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Modulating Source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PWM e Modulating source Internal or External The default is Internal e If you select the External source the pulse waveform is modulated with an external waveform The width deviation or duty cycle deviation is controlled by the 5V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the duty cycle to 10 and the duty cycle deviation to 5 then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum duty cycle 15 When the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the minimum duty cycle 5 Modulation In 5 V OV e Front Pand Operation After enabling PWM press the Source softkey e Remotelnterface Operation PWM SOURce INTernal EXTernal 98 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Frequency Sweep In the frequency sweep mode the function generator steps from the start frequency to the stop frequency at a sweep rate which you specify You can sweep up or down in frequency and with either linear or logarithmic spacing Y ou can also configure the function generator to output a single sweep one pass from start frequency to stop frequency by applying an external or manual trigge
270. orm relative to the offset voltage In the normal mode default the waveform goes positive during the first part of the cycle In the inverted mode the waveform goes negative during the first part of the cycle The POL query returns NORM or INV As shown in the examples below the waveform is inverted relative to the offset voltage Any offset voltage present will remain unchanged when the waveform is inverted Normal Inverted Normal Inverted y as ee SAN ae Nk Xe ay SF ae No Offset Voltage With Offset Voltage When a waveform is inverted the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted OUTPut SYNC OFF ON OUTPut SYNC Disable or enable the front panel Sync connector At lower amplitudes you can reduce output distortion by disabling the Sync signal The default setting is ON The sync query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON For more details on the Sync signal for each waveform function see Sync Output Signal on page 68 When the Sync signal is disabled the output level on the Sync connector is a logic low level When a waveform is inverted OUTP POL command the Sync signal associated with the waveform is not inverted The OUTP SYNC command is overridden by the setting of the MARK command used with the sweep mode see page 215 Therefore when the marker frequency is enabled and the sweep mode is also enabled the OUTP SYNC command is ignored
271. ot have a query form PHASe UNLock ERRor STATe OFF ON PHASe UNLock ERRor STATe Disable or enable the function generator from generating an error if the phase lock is ever lost The default is OFF If the phase lock is lost and the error is enabled a Reference phase locked loop is unlocked error is generated The unlock error setting is not stored in non volatile memory That is the setting will be lost when the power is cycled The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON 249 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference The SCPI Status System The SCPI Status System This section describes the structure of the SCPI status system used by the function generator The status system records various conditions and states of the instrument in several register groups as shown on the following page Each of the register groups is made up of several low level registers called Condition registers Event registers and Enable registers which control the action of specific bits within the register group What is a Condition Register A condition register continuously monitors the state of the instrument The bits in the condition register are updated in real time and the bits are not latched or buffered This is a read only register and bits are not cleared when you read the register A query of a condition register returns a decimal value which corresponds to the binary weighted sum of all bits set in that register
272. ou change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed offset will drop in half SeetheouTP LOAD command on page 182 for more information e Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum offset and amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum offset is limited to 4 95 volts into 50 ohms The 0 DAC value is still used as the offset reference even if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC 167 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command APPLy Command Syntax Because of the use of optional parameters in the APPLy commands enclosed in square brackets you must specify frequency to use the amplitude parameter and you must specify both frequency and amplitude to use the offset parameter For example the following command string is valid frequency and amplitude are specified but offset is omitted and therefore uses a default value APPL SIN 5 0H 3 3 0 However you cannot specify an amplitudeor offset without specifying a frequency You can substitute MINimum MAXimum or DE Fault in place of specific values for the frequency amplitude and offset parameters For example the following statement outputs a 3 Vpp sine wave at
273. ount BURSt MODE TRIGgered GATed BURSt MODE Select the burst mode In the triggered mode the function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received from the specified trigger source TRIG SOUR command In the gated mode the output waveform is either on or off based on the level of the external signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector The default is TRIG The MODE query returns TRIG or GAT e When the gated mode is selected the waveform generator either runs or stops based on the logic level of the gate signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector You can select the polarity of the Trig In connector using the BURS GATE POL command see page 223 When the gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform For a noise waveform the output stops immediately when the gate signal goes false e When the gated mode is selected the burst count burst period and trigger source are ignored these parameters are used for the triggered burst mode only If a manual trigger is received TRIG command it is ignored and no error will be generated 218 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Refere
274. output the burst at a rate determined by the internal rate generator or the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector For this example you will output a three cycle sine wave with a 20 ms burst period You will not change the other parameters from their default settings internal burst source and 0 degree starting phase Select the function and amplitude for the burst For burst waveforms you can select sine square ramp pulse or arbitrary waveforms noise is allowed only in the gated burst mode and dcis not allowed For this example select a sine wave with an amplitude of 5 Vpp Select the burst mode Bust and then verify that the N Cycle internally triggered mode is currently selected Notice that a status message N Cycle Burst is shown in the upper left corner of the display 44 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Burst Waveform 3 Set the burst count Press the Cycles softkey and then set the count to 3 using the numeric keypad or knob Int E i i E Start Burst Gated Infinite Phase Period 4 Set the burst period Press the Burst Period softkey and then set the period to 20 ms using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys The burst period sets the time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst note the display icon gt Burst Int Trigger 29 000ms G ated infinite At this point thefunction generator
275. page 115 for more information on triggering Trigger Out Signal A trigger out signal is provided on the rear panel Trig Out connector used with burst and sweep only When enabled a TTL compatible pulse waveform with either a rising edge default or falling edge is output from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst e When the Internal immediate trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the burst The frequency of the waveform is equal to the specified burst period e When the External trigger source is selected the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the burst e When the Manual trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 us pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each burst e Front Pand Operation After enabling bursts press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Trig Out softkey e Remotelnterface Operation OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger OFF oON 114 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering Triggering Applies to sweep and burst only You can issue triggers for sweeps or bursts using internal t
276. panel display DISPlay TEXT CLEar Clear the text message currently shown on the function generator s front panel display e Ifthe display is currently enabled DISP ON command the DISP TEXT CLEAR command will return the normal front panel display mode e Ifthe display is currently disabled DISP OFF command the DISP TEXT CLEAR command will clear the message but the display will remain disabled To enable the display send the DISP ON command press the L key or send the GTL Go To Local command for GPIB or USB For LAN you can send the SYST COMM RLST LOC command RST Reset the function generator to its factory default state independent of the MEM STAT REC AUTO command setting However RST does not affect stored instrument states stored arbitrary waveforms or the I O settings which are stored in non volatile memory This command will abort a sweep or burst in progress and will re enable the front panel display if it was previously disabled DISP OFF command 244 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Commands TST Perform a complete self test of the function generator Returns 0 PASS or 1 FAIL If the test fails one or more error messages will be generated to provide additional information on the failure Use the SYST ERR command to read the error queue See page 242 SYSTem VERSion Query the function generator to determine the present SCPI version
277. percent PWM DEViation DCYCle lt deviationinpercent gt MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation DCYCle MINimum MAXimum Set the duty cycle deviation in percent percent of period This value represents the peak variation in duty cycle from the duty cycle of the underlying pulse waveform For example if duty cycle is 10 and duty cycle deviation is 5 the duty cycle of the modulated waveform will vary from 5 to 15 The default is 1 percent MIN is approximately 0 MAX is approximately 100 limited by the period minimum pulse width and edge time The DEV DCYc query returns the duty cycle deviation in percent e The duty cycle deviation cannot exceed the current pulse duty cycle e The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wmin Duty Cycle Deviation lt Duty Cycle 100 X Wmin Period and Duty Cycle Deviation lt 100 Duty Cycle 100 X Wmin Period where Wmin 20 ns for period lt 10s Wmin 200 ns for period gt 10s but lt 100 s Wmin 2 us for period gt 100 s but lt 1000 s Wmin 20 us for period gt 1000 s 206 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands e The duty cycle deviation is also limited by the current edge time setting Duty Cycle Dev lt Duty Cycle 160 X Edge Time Period and Duty Cycle Dev lt 100 Duty Cycle 160 X Edge Time Period e Ifyou select the External modulating source PWM SOUR EXT command the deviation is
278. played amplitude by decades press the right cursor key to move the cursor to the units on the right side of the display Then rotate the knob to increase or decrease the displayed amplitude by decades EE an eq Ag Amp Period HiLevel LoLevel 19 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set a DC Offset Voltage To Set a DC Offset Voltage At power on the function generator outputs a sine wave with a dc offset of 0 volts into a 50Q termination The following steps show you how to change the offset to 1 5 mVdc 1 Press the Offset softkey The displayed offset voltage is either the power on value or the offset previously selected When you change functions the same offset is used if the present value is valid for the new function Period HiLevel LoLevel 2 Enter the magnitude of the desired offset Using the numeric keypad enter the value 1 5 select the units by p ng a key below 3 Select the desired units Press the softkey that corresponds to the desired units When you select the units the function generator outputs the waveform with the displayed offset if the output is enabled For this example press MVpc 1 MV oc a Freq B Period HiLevel LoLevel Note You can also enter thedesired value using the knob and cursor keys 20 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Set the High Level and Low Level Values To Set the High Level and Low Level Values You can specify a signal by set
279. r s capabilities and operation e Front Panel Menu Reference on page 33 e ToSelect the Output Termination on page 35 e ToReset the Function Generator on page 35 e ToOutput a Modulated Waveform on page 36 e ToOutput an FSK Waveform on page 38 e ToOutput a PWM Waveform on page 40 e To Output a Frequency Sweep on page 42 e ToOutput a Burst Waveform on page 44 e ToTrigger a Sweep or Burst on page 46 e ToStorethe Instrument State on page 47 e ToConfigure the Remote Interface on page 48 32 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation Front Panel Menu Reference Front Panel Menu Reference This section gives an overview of the front panel menus The remainder of this chapter contains examples of using the front panel menus Configure the modulation parameters for AM FM PM FSK and PWM e Select the modulation type e Select an internal or external modulation source Specify AM modulation depth modulating frequency and modulation shape Specify FM frequency deviation modulating frequency and modulation shape Specify PM phase deviation modulating frequency and modulation shape Specify FSK hop frequency and FSK rate Specify PWM deviation modulating frequency and modulation shape e e e e e Configure the parameters for frequency sweep e Select linear or logarithmic sweeping Select the start stop frequencies or center span frequencies Select the time
280. r The function generator can produce a frequency sweep for sine square ramp or arbitrary waveforms pulse noise and dc are not allowed For moreinformation on the fundamentals of a sweep refer to chapter 7 Tutorial To Select Sweep e The function generator will not allow the sweep mode to be enabled at the same time that burst or any modulation mode is enabled When you enable sweep the burst or modulation mode is turned off e Front Paned Operation You must enable sweep before setting up any of the other sweep parameters Press See to output a sweep using the present settings for frequency output amplitude and offset e Remotelnterface Operation To avoid multiple waveform changes enable the sweep mode after you have set up the other parameters SWEep STATe OFF ON 99 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Start Frequency and Stop Frequency The start frequency and stop frequency set the upper and lower frequency bounds for the sweep The function generator begins at the start frequency sweeps to the stop frequency and then resets back to the start frequency e Start and Stop frequencies 1 uHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The sweep is phase continuous over the full frequency range The default start frequency is 100 Hz Thedefault stop frequency is 1 kHz e Tosweep up in frequency set the start frequency lt stop frequency To sweep
281. r 4 Remote Interface Reference Burst Mode Commands BURSt INTernal PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum BURSt INTernal PERiod MINimum MAXimum Set the burst period for internally triggered bursts The burst period defines time from the start of one burst to the start of the next burst Select from 1 us to 500 seconds The default is 10 ms MAX 500s MIN based on the burst count and waveform frequency as shown below The PER query returns the burst period in seconds e The burst period setting is used only when Immediate triggering is enabled TRIG SOUR IMM command The burst period is ignored when manual or external triggering is enabled or when the gated burst mode is selected e Itis not possible to specify a burst period which is too short for the function generator to output with the specified burst count and frequency see below If the burst period is too short the function generator will automatically adjust it as needed to continuously re trigger the burst From the remote interface a Data out of range error will be generated and theburst period will be adjusted as described Burst Period gt BurstCount__ 999 ns Waveform F requency BURSt PHASe lt angle MINimum MAXimum BURSt PHASe MINimum MAXimum Set the starting phase for the burst in degrees or radians as specified by the previous UNIT ANGL command Select from 360 degrees to 360 degrees or 2r to 27 radians The default is O degrees
282. r expressed in dot notation nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn in each case is a byte value from 0 to 255 Each byte is expressed as a decimal value with no leading zeros for example 169 254 2 20 e You need not set an IP address if DHCP is in use However If the DHCP server fails to assign a valid IP address the currently configured IP Address setting is used e Contact your network administrator for a valid IP address to use for your function generator e Enter the P address using the numeric keypad not the knob e ThelP address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Front pand operation Press vuy and press the I O softkey Then select LAN followed by IP Setup By default DHCP is On Select DHCP Off if necessary The IP Address field appears e Thereis noSCPI command to set an IP address Subnet Mask LAN Subnetting allows the network administrator to divide a network into smaller networks to simplify administration and to minimize network traffic The subnet mask indicates the portion of the host address to be used to indicate the subnet e You need not set a subnet mask if DHCP is in use e Contact your network administrator to find out whether subnetting is being used and for the correct subnet mask e Enter the subnet mask using the numeric keypad not the knob e The subnet mask is stored in non volatile memory and does not cha
283. rary waveform Crest factor is the ratio of the peak value to the RMS value of the waveform The default arb nameis the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command e If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA ATTRibute POINts lt arb name Query the number of points in the specified arbitrary waveform Returns a value from 1 to 65 536 points The default arb nameis the arbitrary waveform currently active Selected with FUNC USER command e If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA ATTRibute PTPeak lt arbname gt Query the peak to peak value of all data points for the specified arbitrary waveform The default arb name is the arbitrary waveform currently active Selected with FUNC USER command e This command returns a value from 0 to 1 0 with 1 0 indicating full amplitude available e The maximum amplitude will be limited if the data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of binary values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms e If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error
284. rding to ISO IEC Guide 22 and CEN CENELEC EN 45014 er a Agilent Technologies Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Incorporated Manufacturer s Address 815 14th Street SW Loveland Colorado 80537 USA Declares that the product Product Name 20 MHz Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Model Number 33220A Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above product s Conforms with the following European Directives The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC including 93 68 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly Conforms with the following product standards EMC Standard Limit IEC 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2000 EN 61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 1 CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A IEC 61000 4 2 1995 A1 1998 EN 61000 4 2 1995 4kV CD 8kV AD IEC 61000 4 3 1995 EN 61000 4 3 1995 3 V m 80 1000 MHz IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5kV signal lines 1kV power lines IEC 61000 4 5 1995 EN 61000 4 5 1995 0 5 kV line line 1 kV line ground IEC 61000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1996 3V 0 15 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 11 1994 Dips 30 10ms 60 100ms Interrupt gt 95 5000ms Canada ICES 001 1998 l Australia New Zealand AS NZS 2064 1 Ml This product was tested in a typical configuration with Agilent Technologies test systems 2 This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES 001
285. remote interface you can only recall a stored state using a number 0 through 4 MEM STATE NAME 1 TEST WFORM 1 To configure the function generator to automatically recall the power down state when power is restored send the following command MEMory STATe RECall AUTO ON 128 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations Error Conditions A record of up to 20 command syntax or hardware errors can be stored in the function generator s error queue See chapter 5 for a complete listing of the errors e Errors are retrieved in first in first out FIFO order The first error returned is the first error that was stored Errors are cleared as you read them The function generator beeps once each time an error is generated unless you have disabled the beeper e If morethan 20 errors have occurred the last error stored in the queue the most recent error is replaced with Queue overflow No additional errors are stored until you remove errors from the queue If no errors have occurred when you read the error queue the function generator responds with No error e The error queue is cleared by the cLs clear status command or when the power is cycled The errors are also cleared when you read the error queue The error queue is not cleared by an instrument reset RST command e Front Paned Operation Press and then select the topic entitled View the remote command error queue topic numb
286. rence Simplified Programming Overview Simplified Programming Overview This section gives an overview of the basic techniques used to program the function generator over the remote interface This section is only an overview and does not give all of the details you will need to write your own application programs Refer to the remainder of this chapter and also the application examples in chapter 6 for more details You may also want to refer to the reference manual that came with your programming application for further details on instrument control Using the APPLy Command The APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the function generator over the remote interface For example the following command string sent from your computer will output a 3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a 2 5 volt offset APPL SIN 5 0E 3 3 0 2 5 Using the Low Level Commands Although the APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the function generator the low level commands give you more flexibility to change individual parameters For example the following command strings sent from your computer will output a 3 Vpp sine wave at 5 kHz with a 2 5 volt offset FUNC SIN Sadet sine wave function FREQ 5000 Set frequency to 5 kHz VOLT 3 0 Se amplitude to 3 Vpp VOLT OFFS 2 5 Set offset to 2 5 Vdc 161 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Simplified Programming Overview Reading a Query Respon
287. requency set the start frequency gt stop frequency FREQuency STOP lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency STOP MINimum MAXimum Set the stop frequency used in conjunction with the start frequency Select from 1 wHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 1 KHz MIN 1 uHz MAX 20 MHz The STOP query returns the stop frequency in hertz 210 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Frequency Sweep Commands FREQuency CENTer lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency CENTer MINimum MAXimum Set the center frequency used in conjunction with the frequency span Select from 1 uHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 550 Hz MIN 1 uHz MAX based on the frequency span and maximum frequency for the selected function as shown below The CENT query returns the center frequency in hertz Center Frequency max Max Frequency span e The following equation shows the relationship between the center frequency and the start stop frequency Center Frequency Stop F requency 2 Start F requency FREQuency SPAN lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency SPAN MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency span used in conjunction with the center frequency Select from 0 Hz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 900 Hz MIN 0 Hz MAX based on the center fr
288. ress the Offset softkey to enter the desired offset voltage level Remote Interface Operation FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC USER You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 56 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Output Frequency As shown below the output frequency range depends on the function currently selected The default frequency is 1 kHz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 wHz 20 MHz Ramp 1 wHz 200 kHz Pulse 500 wHz 5 MHz Noise DC Not Applicable Not Applicable Arbs 1 wHz 6 MHz e Function Limitations If you change to a function whose maximum frequency is less than that of the current function the frequency is adjusted to the maximum value for the new function For example if you are currently outputting a 20 MHz sine wave and then change to the ramp function the function generator will automatically adjust the output frequency to 200 kHz the upper limit for ramps e Burst Limitation For internally triggered bursts the minimum frequency is 2 001 mHz For sine and square waveforms frequencies above 6 MHz are allowed only with an infinite burst count e Duty CycleLimitations For square waveforms the function generator may not be able to use the full range of duty cycle values at higher frequencies as shown below 20
289. rigger command is received Totrigger the function generator from the remote interface GPIB USB or LAN send the TRG trigger command The front panel key is illuminated when the function generator is waiting for a bus trigger e When the External or Bus trigger source is selected the burst count and burst phase remain in effect but the burst period is ignored e TheAPPLy command automatically sets the trigger source to Immediate equivalent to TRIG SOUR IMM command e Toensure synchronization when the Bus source is selected send the WAI wait command When the wAI command is executed the function generator waits for all pending operations to complete before executing any additional commands For example the following command string guarantees that the first trigger is accepted and the operation is executed before the second trigger is recognized TRIG SOUR BUS TRG WAI TRG WAI e You can use the oPpc operation complete query command or the OPC operation complete command to signal when the burst is complete The opc command returns 1 to the output buffer when the burst is complete The oPc command sets the Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event register when the burst is complete TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative TRIGger SLOPe Select whether the function generator uses the rising edge or falling edge of the trigger signal on the rear panel Trig In connector for an externally tr
290. riggering external triggering or manual triggering Internal or automatic triggering is enabled when you turn on the function generator In this mode the function generator outputs continuously when the sweep or burst mode is selected External triggering uses the rear panel Trig In connector to control the sweep or burst The function generator initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time Trig In receives a TTL pulse You can select whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the external trigger signal Manual triggering initiates one sweep or outputs one burst each time YOU press Cisse from the front panel Continue pressing this key to retrigger the function generator The key is disabled when in remote and when a function other than burst or sweep is currently selected Trigger Source Choices Applies to sweep and burst only You must specify the source from which the function generator will accept a trigger Sweep trigger source Internal External or Manual Thedefault is Internal The function generator will accept a manual trigger a hardware trigger from the rear panel Trig In connector or continuously output sweeps or bursts using an internal trigger At power on internal trigger is selected 115 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering e The trigger source setting is stored in volatile memory the source is set to internal trigger front panel or immediate
291. rnal modulating frequency in hertz PM DEViation lt deviation in degress gt MINimum MAXimum PM DEViation MINimum MAXimum Set the phase deviation in degrees This value represents the peak variation in phase of the modulated waveform from the carrier waveform Select any value from 0 to 360 degrees The default is 180 degrees MIN 0 degrees MAX 360 degrees The DEV query returns the phase deviation in degrees e Ifyou select the External modulating source PM SOUR EXT command the deviation is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the frequency deviation to 180 degrees then a 5V signal level corresponds to a 180 degree phase deviation Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels producea negative phase shift PM STATe OFF ON PM STATe Disable or enable PM To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable PM after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns O OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable PM and AM at the same time When you enable PM the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow PM to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable PM the sweep or burst mode is turned
292. rom theremoteinterface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the amplitude will be adjusted as described 173 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the output frequency MIN selects the lowest frequency allowed for the selected function and MAX selects the highest frequency allowed The default is 1 kHz for all functions The FREQ query returns the frequency setting in hertz for the function currently selected Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 wHz 20 MHz Ramp 1 wHz 200 kHz Pulse 500 wHz 5 MHz Noise DC Not Applicable Not Applicable Arbs 1 wHz 6 MHz e Function Limitations The frequency limits are function dependent as shown in the above table If you send a command specifying a frequency that is not in the appropriate range for the current function an error will occur For example if the current function is camp and you send the command FREQ 20 MHz a Data out of range error is generated and the frequency is set to 200 kHz which is the maximum for a ramp waveform e Duty CycleLimitations For square waveforms the function generator may not be able to use the full range of duty cycle values at higher frequencies as shown below 20 to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz If you change to a freque
293. ront Pand Operation Press the Trigger Setup softkey and then select the desired source by pressing the Source softkey Tospecify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the Trig In connector press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Slope softkey e Remote nterface Operation TRIGger SOURce IMMediate EXTernal BUS Use the following command to specify whether the function generator triggers on the rising or falling edge of the signal on the Trig In connector TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative See Triggering on page 115 for moreinformation 104 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Trigger Out Signal A trigger out signal is provided on the rear panel Trig Out connector used with sweep and burst only When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with either a rising edge default or falling edge is output from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep When the Internal immediate trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep The frequency of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time When the External trigger source is selected the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally trig
294. rrently selected parameter shown in the upper left corner of the display and the ial numeric value field are both highlighted we femi Period HiLewel LoLevel Width Select the desired parameter To select a specific parameter note the softkey labels at the bottom of the display For example to select period press the Period softkey e Asinthenormal display mode you can edit numbers using either the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys e Parameters which normally toggle when you press a key a second time also toggle in the Graph Mode However you can see only one label for each softkey at one time for example Freq or Period after remote interface operations 25 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform To Output a Stored Arbitrary Waveform There are five built in arbitrary waveforms stored in non volatile memory The following steps show you how to output the built in exponential fall waveform from the front pand For information on creating a custom arbitrary waveform refer to To Create and Store an Arbitrary Waveform on page 120 Select the arbitrary waveform function When you press the key to select the arbitrary waveform function a temporary message is displayed indicating which waveform is currently selected the default is exponential rise Select the active waveform Press the Select Wform softkey and then press the B
295. rs indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines you can send the abbreviated form For better program readability you can send the long form For example in the above syntax statement FREQ and FREQUENCY are both acceptable forms You can use upper or lower case letters Therefore FREQUENCY freq and Freq areall acceptable Other forms such aS FRE and FREQUEN will generate an error e Braces endosethe parameter choices for a given command string The braces are not sent with the command string e A vertical bar separates multiple parameter choices for a given command string e Trianglebrackets lt gt indicate that you must specify a value for the enclosed parameter For example the above syntax statement shows the frequency parameter enclosed in triangle brackets The brackets arenot sent with the command string You must specify a value for the parameter Such aS FREQ 5000 e Some parameters are enclosed in square brackets The square brackets indicate that the parameter is optional and can be omitted The brackets are not sent with the command string If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the function generator chooses a default value 267 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language Command Separators A colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower level keyword You must insert a blank spacet
296. s disabled e The display is automatically enabled when power is cycled after an instrument reset RST Command or when you return to local front panel operation Press the tsa key or execute the IE E E 488 GTL GoToLocal command from the remote interface to return to the local state e Thedisplay state is saved when you store the instrument state using SAV command When you recall the instrument state using RCL command the front panel display will return to the previous state 243 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Commands DISPlay TEXT lt quoted string gt DISPlay TEXT Display a text message on the function generator s front panel display Sending a text message to the display overrides the display state as set by the DISP command The TEXT query reads the message sent to the front panel display and returns a quoted string e You can use upper or lower case letters A Z numbers 0 9 and any other character on a standard computer keyboard Depending on the number of characters you specify in the string the function generator will choose one of two font sizes to display the message You can display approximately 12 characters in a large font and approximately 40 characters in a small font An example is shown below DISP TEXT Test in Progress e Whilea message is displayed information relating to the output waveform such as frequency and amplitude is not sent to the front
297. se Only the query commands commands that end with will instruct the function generator to send a response message Queries return internal instrument settings F or example the following command string sent from your computer will read the function generator s error queue and retrieve the response from the most recent error dimension statement Dimension string array 255 dements SYST ERR Read error queue enter statement Enter error string response Selecting a Trigger Source When Sweep or Burst is enabled the function generator will accept an immediate internal trigger a hardware trigger from the rear panel TrigIn connector a manual trigger from the front panel key ora software bus trigger By default the internal trigger source is selected If you want to use an external or a software trigger source you must first select that source F or example the following command strings sent from your computer will output a 3 cycle burst each time the rear panel Trig In connector receives the rising edge of a TTL pulse BURS NCYC 3 Set burst count to 3 cycles TRIG SLOP POS Se polarity to rising edge TRIG SOUR EXT Select external trigger source BURS STAT ON Enable burst mode 162 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Using the APPLy Command Using the APPLy Command See also Output Configuration starting on page 55 in chapter 3 The APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the fu
298. se width 337 FSK Carrier Waveforms Source Internal Modulation Chapter 8 Specifications Agilent 33220A Function Arbitrary Waveform Generator Sine Square Ramp Arb Internal External 50 duty cycle square 2 mHz to 100 kHz External Modulation Input for AM FM PM PWM Voltage Range Input Resistance Bandwidth Sweep Waveforms Type Direction Sweep Time Trigger Marker Burst M Waveforms Type Start Stop Phase Internal Period Gate Source Trigger Source 5 V full scale 5 KQ typical DC to 20 kHz Sine Square Ramp Arb Linear or Logarithmic Up or Down 1 ms to 500 s Single External or Internal Falling edge of Sync signal programmable frequency Sine Square Ramp Triangle Pulse Noise Arb Counted 1 to 50 000 cycles Infinite Gated 360 to 360 degrees 1 us to 500 s External Trigger Single External or Internal Trigger Characteristics Trigger Input Input Level Slope Pulse Width Input Impedance Latency Jitter RMS Trigger Output Level Pulse Width Output Impedance Maximum Rate Fanout TTL compatible Rising or falling selectable gt 100 ns gt 10 kQ DC coupled lt 500 ns 6 ns 3 5 ns for Pulse TTL compatible into gt 1kQ gt 400 ns 50 Q typical 1 MHz lt 4 Agilent 33220As Programming Times typical Configuration Times USB 2 0 XE
299. se waveforms In PWM the pulse width or duty cycle of the carrier waveform is varied according to the modulating waveform You can specify either a pulse width and width deviation or a pulse duty cycle and duty cycle deviation the deviation to be controlled by the modulating waveform For this example you will specify a pulse width and pulse width deviation for a 1 kHz pulse waveform with a 100 Hz sine wave modulating waveform 1 Select the carrier waveform parameters Pulse and then press the Freq Ampl Offset Width and Edge Time softkeys to configure the carrier waveform F or this example select a 1 kHz pulse waveform with an amplitude of 1 Vpp a zero offset a pulse width of 100 us and an edge time of 50 ns 2 Select PWM PWM is the only modulation type for Pulse Notice that a status message PWM by Sine is shown in the upper left corner of the display 3 Set the width deviation Press the Width Dev softkey and set the value to 20 us using the numeric 0 00 us Lill nh PYM Shane Sing 40 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a PWM Waveform 4 Set the modulating frequency Press the PWM Freq softkey and then set the value to 5 Hz using the numeric keypad or the knob and cursor keys Punt by Sine 5 000 H HEF Width 5 Select the modulating waveform shape Press the Shape softkey to select the shape of the modulating waveform For this example select a sin
300. se width EdgeTime lt 0 625 X Pulse Width Data out of range pulse edge time limited by duty cycle value clipped to The specified edge time must fit within the specified pulse duty cycle as shown below The function generator will adjust the edge time as needed to accommodate the specified pulse duty cycle EdgeTime lt 0 625 X Period X Duty Cycle 100 Data out of range period value clipped to This generic message indicates that the pulse period has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range frequency value clipped to This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been limited to an upper or lower boundary Data out of range user frequency value clipped to upper limit This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been limited to an upper boundary due to the selection of the arbitrary waveform function APPL USER or FUNC USER command 288 222 222 222 222 222 222 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Data out of range ramp frequency value clipped to upper limit This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been limited to an upper boundary due to the selection of the ramp waveform function APPL RAMP or FUNC RAMP command Data out of range pulse frequency value clipped to upper limit This generic message indicates that the waveform frequency has been limited to an upper boundary due to
301. source is selected the function generator outputs a pulse gt 1 us pulse width from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of each sweep or burst Front Pand Operation After enabling sweeps or burst press the Trigger Setup softkey Then select the desired edge by pressing the Trig Out softkey Remote nterface Operation OUTPut TRIGger SLOPe POSitive NEGative OUTPut TRIGger OFF ON 119 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms Arbitrary Waveforms There are five built in arbitrary waveforms stored in non volatile memory You can also store up to four user defined waveforms in non volatile memory in addition to one in volatile memory Each waveform can contain between 1 a dc voltage and 65 536 64K data points You can create an arbitrary waveform from the front panel as described in the following section or you can use the Agilent I ntuiLink software provided on the CD ROM included with the Agilent 33220A The Agilent IntuiLink software allows you to create arbitrary waveforms using a graphical user interface on your PC and then download them into the Agilent 33220A Y ou can also capture waveforms from your Agilent oscilloscope and import them into IntuiLink Please see the online help included with the Agilent I ntuiLink software for further information Note You can download waveforms of up to 65 536 64K data points into the Agilent 33220A from your PC However only waveforms of 16 384 16K
302. ss LAN 49 settings default 145 shipping contents 15 shock hazard 6 signal imperfections 320 sin x x waveform 228 sinc waveform 228 sinewave spectral purity 336 slope trigger trigger input 214 trigger output 214 slope trigger 214 222 225 burst 113 sweep 104 softkey labels 4 software bus trigger 117 213 221 224 software revision 134 software connectivity 15 sound beeper 130 specifications 335 spurs 321 square wave duty cyde 64 180 duty cycle selection 23 tutorial description 318 SRQ 254 standard event register bit definitions 258 commands 262 operation 258 start frequency sweep 210 starting phase burst 112 220 state storage 126 238 front panel operation 47 naming 127 naming from front panel 47 naming location 240 power down recall 126 STATus PRESet command 263 QUEStionable CONDition command 261 ENABle command 261 QUEStionable command 261 status byte register bit definitions 252 commands 260 operation 252 status registers 250 condition register 250 enable register 250 event register 250 questionable data register 256 register diagram 251 standard event register 258 status byte register 252 status system 250 stop frequency sweep 210 stored state recall power down state 241 349 stored states 126 238 default names 240 deleting from memory 240 front panel operation 47 naming 127 naming from front panel 47 power down recall 126 strings error 273 subnet mask 137 support
303. st the waveform parameters in the following order as needed to generate a valid pulse 1 edge time 2 pulse width or duty cycle and then 3 period In this case the function generator has decreased the edge time to accommodate the specified pulse duty cycle Edge Time lt 0 625 X Period X Duty Cycle 100 Settings conflict amplitude changed due to function In some cases the amplitude limits are determined by the output units currently selected This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms upper limit for sine waves in Vrms Settings conflict offset changed on exit from dc function In the dc voltage function the voltage level is controlled by adjusting the offset voltage the current amplitude is ignored When you select a different function the function generator will adjust the offset voltage as needed to be compatible with the current amplitude setting 284 221 221 221 221 221 Chapter 5 Error Messages Execution Errors Settings conflict FM deviation cannot exceed carrier The carrier frequency must always be greater than or equal to the frequency deviation If you set the carrier to a value less than the deviation frequency with
304. state the waveform data is lost and the function generator will not output the waveform when the state is recalled The built in exponential rise waveform is output in place of the deleted waveform 238 RCL 0 1 2 3 4 Recall the instrument state stored in the specified non volatile storage location You cannot recall the instrument state from a storage location that is empty Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference State Storage Commands When power is turned off the function generator automatically stores its state in storage location 0 You can configure the function generator to automatically recall the power down state when power is restored SeetheMEM STAT REC AUTO command on page 241 for more information The front panel display state DISP command is saved when you store the instrument state When you recall the instrument state the front panel display will return to the previous state An instrument reset RST command does not affect the configurations stored in memory Once a state is stored it remains until it is overwritten or specifically deleted When shipped from the factory storage locations 1 through 4 are empty location 0 has the power on state From the remote interface only you can use location 0 to store a fifth instrument state you cannot store to this location from the front panel However keep in mind that location 0 is automatically overwritten
305. t RST Command or when you return to local front panel operation Press the ta key or execute the IE E E 488 GTL GoTo Local command from the remote interface to return to the local state e Thedisplay state is saved when you store the instrument state using SAV command When you recall the instrument state using RCL command the front pane display will return to the previous state e You can display a text message on the front panel by sending a command from the remote interface You can use upper or lower case letters A Z numbers 0 9 and any other character on a standard computer keyboard Depending on the number of characters that you specify the function generator will choose one of two font sizes to display the message You can display approximately 12 characters in a large font and approximately 40 characters in a small font 132 Chapter 3 Features and Functions System Related Operations e Remotelnterface Operation The following command turns off the front panel display DISP OFF The following command displays a message on the front panel and turns on the display if currently disabled DISP TEXT Test in Progress Toclear the message displayed on the front pane without changing the display state send the following command DISP TEXT CLEAR Number Format The function generator can show numbers on the front panel display with periods or commas for the decimal point and digits separator
306. t Pand Operation To set the carrier frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency e Remotelnterface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command 86 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Phase Modulation PM Modulating Waveform Shape The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PM Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle 1 e Ramp has 100 symmetry a e Triangle has 50 symmetry wow Negative ramp has 0 symmetry gt You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation Front Pand Operation After enabling PM press the Shape softkey Remote nterface Operation PM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Modulating Waveform Frequency The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PM Modulating frequency internal source 2 MHz to 20 kHz The defau
307. t character must always be a letter CALibration COUNt Query the instrument to determine the number of times it has been calibrated Note that your instrument was calibrated before it left the factory When you receive your instrument from the factory be sure to read the count to determine its initial value e The calibration count is stored in non volatile memory The count increments up to a maximum of 65 535 after which it rolls over to 0 Since the value increments by one for each calibration point a complete calibration may increase the value by many counts CALibration STRing lt quoted string gt CALibration STRing Store a message in non volatile calibration memory Storing a message will overwrite any message previously stored in memory The STR query reads the calibration message and returns a quoted string e The calibration message may contain up to 40 characters additional characters are truncated An example is shown below CAL STR Cal Due 01 June 2003 e You can record a calibration message only from the remote interface and only when the instrument is unsecured You can read the message either from the front panel or over the remote interface You can read the calibration message whether the instrument is secured or unsecured 265 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language An Introduction to the SCPI Language SCPI Standard Commands for Progra
308. t up the other parameters BURSt STATe OFF ON 106 Triggered Burst Mode Chapter 3 Features and Functions Burst Mode Burst Type You can use burst in one of two modes as described below The function generator enables one burst mode at a time based on the trigger source and burst source that you select See the table below Triggered Burst Mode In this mode default the function generator outputs a waveform with a specified number of cycles burst count each time a trigger is received After the specified number of cycles have been output the function generator stops and waits for the next trigger You can configure the function generator to use an internal trigger to initiate the burst or you can provide an external trigger by pressing the front panel key applying a trigger signal to the rear panel Trig In connector or sending a software trigger command from the remote interface External Gated Burst Mode In this mode the output waveform is either on or off based on the level of the external signal applied to the rear panel Trig In connector When the gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase of the selected waveform For a noise waveform the output stops immediately when the gate signa
309. technical 7 swapped byte order 232 SWE ep SPACing command 212 STATe command 212 TIME command 212 sweep 99 332 center frequency 101 211 external trigger source 118 frequency span 101 211 front panel operation 40 42 linear vs logarithmic 102 212 332 marker frequency 103 215 overview 208 spacing 102 start frequency 100 210 stop frequency 100 210 sweep time 102 212 Sync signal 100 trigger out signal 105 trigger output 119 trigger source 104 sweeps Sync signal 101 symmetry 65 symmetry definition 65 181 Sync connector 215 sync signal 333 enable disable 69 for all waveform functions 68 Sync connector 68 syntax SCPI commands 149 SYSTem BEEPer STATe command 245 BEEPer command 245 246 COM Municate RLSTate command 247 ERRor command 242 VERSion command 245 system error 129 242 T technical support 7 temperature overload 30 terminal 10 MHz In 248 10 MHz Out 248 Modulation In 78 84 92 98 Output 181 Sync Output 68 Sync output 215 TrigIn 118 Trig Out 119 214 223 226 termination 35 63 termination load 323 terminators command 269 test 131 245 text message calibration 144 265 The 96 97 time sweep 212 tone enable disable 245 246 transition time pulse 189 translated language system 28 help Trig In connector 118 Trig Out connector 119 214 223 226 TRI Gger SLOPe command 214 222 225 SOURce command 213 221 224 trigger burst 113 bus software 221 224 external 213
310. ted to a load through a coaxial cable Any difference in ground potentials Vgyp will tend to make current I cND flow in the shield of the cable thus causing a voltage drop due to the shield s impedance Zspieig The resulting voltage drop lenp X Zshield appears as an error in the load voltage However since the instrument is isolated there is a high series impedance typically 1 MQ in parallel with 45 nF in the path to oppose the flow of I cnp and thereby minimize this effect 323 Chapter 7 Tutorial Ground Loops Agilent 33220A 50Q VV A A IIN SA VV 000 1 ss ers fee Z hiel Z OS Veen Vout Snieg RL lt Vi Vout lanp X Zsnield e o V e lt Ground Loop Effects At frequencies above a few kilohertz a coaxial cable s shield becomes inductive rather than resistive and the cable acts as a transformer When this happens it tends to force the shield and center conductor currents to be equal but opposite F or any voltage drop in the shield due tolGnp thereis a similar drop in the center conductor This is known as the balun effect and it reduces ground loops at higher frequencies Note that lower shield resistance causes the balun effect to become more of a factor at lower frequencies Therefore coaxial cables with two or three braided shields are much better than those with single braided or foil shields To reduce errors due to ground loops connect the function generator to the load
311. ternal modulation source The default is INT The SOUR query returns INT or EXT e If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The frequency deviation is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear pane Modulation In connector For example if you have set the deviation to 100 kHz using the FM DEV command then a V signal level corresponds toa 100 kHz increase in frequency Lower external signal levels produce less deviation and negative signal levels reduce the frequency below the carrier frequency FM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER FUNCtion Select the shape of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected FM SOUR INT command You can use noise as the modulating waveshape but you cannot use noise pulse or dc as the carrier waveform The default is SIN The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP NRAM TRI NOIS or USER e Select SQU for a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle U e Select RAMP for a ramp waveform with 100 symmetry wee e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry ok e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform with 0 symmetry e If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform poi
312. tes Therefore each waveform data point requires 16 bits which must be transferred as two bytes on the function generator s interfaces DATA CoPpy lt destination arb name gt VOLATILE Copy the waveform from volatile memory to the specified name in non volatile memory The source for the copy is always volatile You cannot copy from any other source and you cannot copy to volatile e Thearb name may contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed If you specify a name with more than 12 characters a Program mnemonic too long error is generated e The VOLATILE parameter is optional and can be omitted Note that the keyword VOLATILE does not have a short form e The following built in waveform names are reserved and cannot be used with the DATA COPY command EXP_RISE EXP_FALL NEG RAMP SINC and CARDIAC If you specify one of the built in waveforms a Cannot overwrite a built in waveform error is generated e The function generator does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Therefore ARB_1 and arb_1 are the same name All characters are converted to upper case 232 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands e If you copy toa waveform name that already exists the previous waveform
313. the error string may contain up to 255 characters 113 Undefined header 242 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference System Related Commands IDN Read the function generator s identification string which contains four fields separated by commas The first field is the manufacturer s name the second field is the model number the third field is the serial number and the fourth field is a revision code which contains four numbers separated by dashes e Thecommand returns a string with the following format be sure to dimension a string variable with at least 50 characters Agilent Technologies 33220A lt serial number gt f ff b bb aa p f ff Firmwarerevision number b bb Boot kernel revision number aa ASIC revision number p Printed circuit board revision number DISPlay OFF ON DISPlay Disable or enable the function generator front panel display When it is disabled the front panel display is blanked however the bulb used to backlight the display remains enabled The DISP query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e With the front panel display disabled there will be some improvement in command execution speed from the remote interface e Sending a message to the front panel display from the remote interface DISP TEXT command overrides the display state This means that you can display a message even if the display is disabled remote interface errors are always displayed even if the display i
314. the front panel also changes the security code as seen from the remote interface e Remotelnterface Operation To change the security code you must first unsecure the function generator using the old security code Then enter the new code as shown below CAL SECURE STATE OFF AT33220A Unsecurewith old code CAL SECURE CODE SN123456789 Enter new code Calibration Count You can query the function generator to determine how many calibrations have been performed Note that your function generator was calibrated before it left the factory When you receive your function generator be sure to read the count to determine its initial value e Thecalibration count is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e The calibration count increments up to a maximum of 65 535 after which it rolls over to 0 Since the value increments by one for each calibration point a complete calibration may increase the value by many counts e Front Paned Operation Press vuy and then select the Cal Info softkey from the Test Cal menu The calibration count is listed as one of the messages on the display e Remote nterface Operation CALibration COUNt 143 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Calibration Overview Calibration Message The function generator allows you to store one message in calibration memory in the mainframe For example you can store such in
315. the sweep or burst The default is OFF The TRIG query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON 226 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands Arbitrary Waveform Commands See also Arbitrary Waveforms starting on page 120 in chapter 3 Arbitrary Waveform Overview The following is an overview of the steps required to download and output an arbitrary waveform over the remote interface The commands used for arbitrary waveforms are listed on page 229 Refer to chapter 7 Tutorial for moreinformation on theinternal operation of downloading and outputting an arbitrary waveform Note You can download waveforms of up to 65 536 64K points into the Agilent 33220A from your PC However waveforms of greater than 16 384 16K points cannot be edited from theAgil ent 33220A front pand Chapter 6 Application Programs includes an example program showing how to download an arbitrary waveform into the Agilent 33220A Download the waveform points into volatile memory You can download from 1 point a dc signal to 65 536 64K points per waveform You can download the points as floating point values binary integer values or decimal integer values Use the DATA command to download floating point values from 1 0 to 1 0 Use the DATA DAC command to download binary integer or decimal integer values from 8191 to 8191 To ensure that binary data is downloaded properly you must select t
316. tically adjusted tothe maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 12 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 the upper limit for this frequency e The duty cycle setting does not apply to a square waveform used as the modulating waveform for AM FM PM or PWM A 50 duty cycle is always used for a modulating square waveform The duty cycle setting applies only to a square waveform carrier e Front Paned Operation After selecting the square wave function press the Duty Cycle softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired duty cyde 64 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration e Remote nterface Operation FUNCtion SQUare DCYCle lt percents gt MINimum MAXimum The APPLy command automatically sets the duty cycle to 50 Symmetry Ramp Waves Applies to ramp waves only Symmetry represents the amount of time per cycle that the ramp wave is rising assuming that the waveform is not inverted 0 Symmetry 100 Symmetry e Thesymmetry is stored in volatile memory the symmetry is set to 100 the default when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming the Power On state is set to default e Thesymmetry setting is remembered when you change from ramp wave to another function When you return to the ramp function the previous symmetry is used
317. ting its amplitude and dc offset values as described previously Another way to set the limits of a signal is to specify its high level maximum and low level minimum values This is typically convenient for digital applications In the following example let s set the high level to 1 0 V and the low level to 0 0 V Press the Ampl softkey to select Ampl Press the softkey again to toggle to Hil evel Note that both the Ampl and Offset softkeys toggle together to HiLevel and LoLevel respectively l 76mV Mo Set the HiL evel value Using the numeric keypad or the knob select a value of 1 0 V If you are using the keypad you will need to select the unit V to enter the value B Frec Ampl Oftset Period EE a casas LoLeve Press the LoLevel softkey and set the value Again use the numeric keypad or the knob to enter a value of 0 0 V o 000 V fay Ampl Offset Period wee Se Note that these settings high level 1 0 V and low level 0 0 V are equivalent to setting an amplitude of 1 0 Vpp and an offset of 500 mVdc 21 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Select DC Volts To Select DC Volts You can select the DC Volts feature from the Utility menu and then set a constant dc voltage as an Offset value Let s set DC Volts 1 0 Vdc y and then select the DC On softkey The Offset value becomes selected 2 Enter the desired voltage l
318. tivity software to enable communications over these interfaces Refer to the instructions provided on the CD ROM to install this software on your PC e GPIB Interface You need only set the GPIB address for the function generator and connect it to your PC using a GPIB cable e USB Interface There is nothing to configure on your function generator J ust connect the function generator to the PC with a USB cable e LAN Interface By default DHCP is On which may enable network communication over the LAN interface You may need to set several configuration parameters as described in the LAN configuration sections that follow For detailed background information refer to the Agilent Technologies USB LAN GPIB Connectivity Guide which you can download from the Agilent web site at the following URL www agilent com find connectivity 135 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Remote Interface Configuration GPIB Address Each device on the GPIB IEE E 488 interface must havea unique address You can set the function generator s address to any value between 0 and 30 The address is set to 10 when the function generator is shipped from the factory The GPIB address is displayed at power on e The address is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset e Your computer s GPIB interface card has its own address Be sure to avoid using the computer s address f
319. tly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury or death Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met CAUTION A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating proce dure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to the product or loss of important data Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Symbols zie Earth ground Chassis ground Lv Risk of electric shock WARNING Main power disconnect Unplug product from wall outlet and remove power cord before servicing Only quali fied service trained personnel should remove the cover from the instrument For continued protection against fire replace the line fuse only with a fuse of the specified type and rating
320. to 80 frequency lt 10 MHz 40 to 60 frequency gt 10 MHz If you change to a frequency that cannot produce the current duty cycle the duty cycle is automatically adjusted to the maximum value for the new frequency For example if you currently have the duty cycle set to 70 and then change the frequency to 12 MHz the function generator will automatically adjust the duty cycle to 60 the upper limit for this frequency 57 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Front Pand Operation To set the output frequency press the Freq softkey for the selected function Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency To set the waveform period instead press the Freq softkey again to toggle to the Period softkey Remote Interface Operation FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum You can also use the APPLy command to select the function frequency amplitude and offset with a single command Output Amplitude The default amplitude is 100 mVpp into 50 ohms for all functions Offset Voltage Limitations The relationship between output amplitude and offset voltage is shown below Vmax is the maximum peak voltage for the selected output termination 5 volts for a 50Q load or 10 volts for a high impedance load Vpp lt 2X Vmax Voffse Limits Dueto Output Termination If you change the output termination setting the displayed output amplitude will be adjusted and no error
321. to append this query response to an APPL command in your programming application and use the result to place the function generator in the specified state The function frequency amplitude and offset are returned as shown in the sample string below the quotation marks are returned as part of the string SIN 5 0000000000000E 03 3 0000000000000E 00 2 5000000000000E 00 171 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Output Configuration Commands Output Configuration Commands See also Output Configuration starting on page 55 in chapter 3 This section describes the low level commands used to program the function generator Although the APPLy command provides the most straightforward method to program the function generator the low level commands give you more flexibility to change individual parameters FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP PULSe NOISe DC USER FUNCtion Select the output function The selected waveform is output using the previously selected frequency amplitude and offset voltage settings The FUNC query returns SIN SQU RAMP PULS NOIS DC or USER e If you select USER the function generator outputs the arbitrary waveform currently selected by the FUNC USER command e The table below shows which output functions are allowed with modulation sweep and burst Each e indicates a valid combination If you change to a function that is not
322. to the carrier level or dBc Harmonic Imperfections Harmonic components always appear at multiples of the fundamental frequency and are created by non linearities in the waveform DAC and other elements of the signal path At low amplitudes another possible source of harmonic distortion is due to the current flowing through the cable connected to the function generator s Sync output connector This current can cause a small square wave voltage drop across the resistance of the cable s shield and some of this voltage can be imposed on the main signal If this is a concern for your application you should remove the cable or disable the Sync output connector If your application requires that you use the Sync output connector you can minimize the effect by terminating the cable in a high impedance load rather than into a 50Q load 320 Chapter 7 Tutorial Signal Imperfections Non Harmonic Imperfections The biggest source of non harmonic spurious components called spurs is the waveform DAC Nonlinearity in the DAC leads to harmonics that are aliased or folded back into the passband of the function generator These spurs are most significant when there is a simple fractional relationship between the signal frequency and the function generator s sampling frequency 50 MHz For example at 15 MHz the DAC produces harmonics at 30 MHz and 45 MHz These harmonics which are 20 MHz and 5 MHz from the function generator
323. to toggle to the Period softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired pulse period e Remotelnterface Operation PULSe PERiod lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 94 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Modulating Waveform Shape The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PWM Modulating waveform shape internal source Sine Square Ramp Negative Ramp Triangle Noise or Arb waveform The default is Sine e Square has 50 duty cycle 1 e Ramp has 100 symmetry a e Triangle has 50 symmetry wow Negative ramp has 0 symmetry If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation Front Pand Operation After enabling PWM press the Shape softkey Remote nterface Operation PWM INTernal FUNCtion SINusoid SQUare RAMP NRAMp TRIangle NOISe USER Modulating Waveform Frequency The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for PWM Modulating frequency internal source 2 MHz to 20 kHz The default is 10 Hz Front Pand Operation After enabling PWM press the PWM Freq softkey Remote nterface Operation PWM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum 95 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Pulse Width Modulation PWM Width Deviation
324. ts indicate optional keywords or parameters e Braces enclose parameters within a command string e Triangle brackets lt gt enclose parameters for which you must substitute a value e A vertical bar separates multiple parameter choices 54 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration Output Configuration This section contains information to help you configure the function generator for outputting waveforms Y ou may never have to change some of the parameters discussed here but they are provided to give you the flexibility you might need Output Function The function generator can output five standard waveforms sine square ramp pulse and noise plus dc You can also select one of five built in arbitrary waveforms or create your own custom waveforms Y ou can internally modulate sine square ramp and arbitrary waveforms using AM FM PM or FSK You can also modulate pulse using PWM Linear or logarithmic frequency sweeping is available for sine square ramp and arbitrary waveforms You can generate a burst waveform using any of the standard or arbitrary waveforms but not dc The default function is sinewave e The table below shows which output functions are allowed with modulation sweep and burst Each e indicates a valid combination If you change to a function that is not allowed with modulation sweep or burst then the modulation or mode is turned off
325. u Operation To Configure the Remote Interface View the current LAN configuration Press the Current Config softkey to view the current LAN configuration To scroll through the configuration use the and J softkeys or rotate the knob Press DONE toreturn tothe LAN menu Exit the menu Press DONE to exit each menu in turn or press ut menu directly ity to exit the Utility More about IP Addresses and Dot Notation Dot notation addresses nnn nnn nnn nnn where nnn is a byte value such as IP addresses must be expressed with care This is because most web software on the PC will interpret byte values with leading zeros as octal numbers Thus 255 255 020 011 is actually equivalent to the decimal 255 255 16 9 rather than 255 255 20 11 because 020 is interpreted as 16 expressed in octal and 011 as 9 To avoid confusion it is best to use only decimal expressions of byte values 0 to 255 with no leading zeros The Agilent 33220A assumes that all IP addresses and other dot notation addresses are expressed as decimal byte values and strips all leading zeros from these byte values Thus if you try to enter 255 255 020 011 in the IP address field it becomes 255 255 20 11 a purely decimal expression You should enter exactly the same expression 255 255 20 11 in your PC web software to address the instrument Do not use 255 255 020 011 the PC will interpret that address differently due t
326. uilt In softkey to select from the five built in waveforms Then press the Exp Fall softkey The waveform is output using the present settings for frequency amplitude and offset unless you change them Exp Neg Fall Ramp Sinc Cardiac CANC Thesedected waveform is now assigned to the J key Whenever you press this key the sa ected arbitrary waveform is output To quickly determine which arbitrary waveform is currently selected press ar 26 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Use the Built In Help System To Use the Built In Help System The built in help system is designed to provide context sensitive assistance on any front panel key or menu softkey A list of help topics is also available to assist you with several front panel operations 1 View the help information for a function key Sine key If the message contains more information than will fit on the display press the 4 softkey or turn the knob clockwise to view the remaining information Press DONE to exit Help 2 View the help information for a menu softkey Press and hold down the Freq softkey I f the message contains more information than will fit on the display press the 4 softkey or rotate the knob clockwise to view the remaining information DONE Press DONE to exit Help 27 Chapter 1 Quick Start To Use the Built In Help System 3 View the list of help topics e key to view the list of available help topics To scr
327. uous waveform Press the Init Points softkey to specify the initial number of waveform points you can add or remove points later if necessary For this example se theinitial number of points to 4 Start the point by point editing process Press the Edit Points softkey to accept the initial waveform settings and begin point by point editing The status line at the top of the display window shows the point number at the left the time value of the current point in the center and the voltage value of the current point to the right Define the first waveform point Press the Voltage softkey to set the voltage level for Point 1 this point is fixed at a time of 0 seconds By default Point 1 is set equal tothe upper limit For this example se the voltage leva of Point 1 to 0 V Poo vor Point Voltage The waveform editor performs all amplitude calculations using Vpp rather than Vrms or dBm 122 9 10 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Arbitrary Waveforms Define the next waveform point Press the Point softkey and then turn the knob to move to Point 2 Press the Time softkey to set the time for the current point this softkey is not available for Point 1 Press the Voltage softkey to set the voltage level for the current point For this example set the time to 2 ms and the voltagelevd to 3 0 V 2 U00ms _ 000ms 7 f nsert Rem End Point Time Yoltage Point Point Store Defi
328. up optional DNS Domain Name Service is an Internet service that translates domain names into IP addresses Ask your network administrator whether DNS is in use and if it is for the host name domain name and DNS server address to use Start at the LAN menu DONE Name 5 i i DONE a Set the Host Name Enter the host name The host name is the host portion of the domain name which is translated into an IP address The host name is entered as a string using the knob and cursor keys to select and change characters The host name may include letters numbers and dashes You can use the keypad for the numeric characters only Press to delete all characters to the right of the cursor position b Set the Domain Name Press the Domain Name softkey and enter the domain name The domain name is translated into an IP address The domain name is entered as a string using the knob and cursor keys to select and change characters The domain name may include letters numbers dashes and periods You can use the keypad for the numeric characters only Press to delete all characters to the right of the cursor position c Set the DNS Server address Press the DNS Server softkey and enter the address of the DNS server in the IP address format using the keypad d Exit the DNS Setup menu Press DONE to return to the LAN menu 51 Chapter 2 Front Panel Men
329. ust be enabled When the external gate signal is true the function generator outputs a continuous waveform When the external gate signal goes false the current waveform cycle is completed and then the function generator stops while remaining at the voltage level corresponding to the starting burst phase F or noise the output stops immediately when the gate signal goes false 118 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Triggering Trigger Output Signal A trigger out signal is provided on the rear panel Trig Out connector used with sweep and burst only When enabled a TTL compatible square waveform with either a rising edge default or falling edge is output from the rear panel Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst Trig In Out OUTPUT 3 V P gt 1us lt lt OV Rising edge shown When the Internal immediate trigger source is selected the function generator outputs a square waveform with a 50 duty cycle from the Trig Out connector at the beginning of the sweep or burst The period of the waveform is equal to the specified sweep time or burst period When the External trigger source is selected the function generator automatically disables the trigger out signal The Trig Out connector cannot be used for both operations at the same time an externally triggered waveform uses the same connector to trigger the sweep or burst When the Bus software or manual trigger
330. ut Configuration Output Termination Applies to output amplitude and offset voltage only The Agilent 33220A has a fixed series output impedance of 50 ohms to the front panel Output connector If the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude and offset levels will be incorrect e Output termination 1Q to 10 KQ or Infinite The default is 50Q The message line at the top of the display calls attention to output termination settings other than 50Q e The output termination setting is stored in non volatile memory and does not change when power has been off or after a remote interface reset assuming the Power On state is set to default e If you specify a 50 ohm termination but are actually terminating into an open circuit the actual output will be twice the value specified For example if you set the offset to 100 mVdc and specify a 50 ohm load but are terminating the output into an open circuit the actual offset will be 200 mV dc e If you change the output termination setting the displayed output amplitude and offset levels are automatically adjusted no error will be generated For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will doubleto 20 Vpp If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half
331. ut connector f the actual load impedance is different than the value specified the displayed amplitude and offset levels will be incorrect The load impedance setting is simply provided as a convenience to ensure that the displayed voltage matches the expected load 2 Navigate the menu to set the output termination Press the Output Setup softkey and then select the Load softkey J A Load Fange High FD Invert Phase DONE 3 Select the desired output termination Use the knob or numeric keypad to select the desired load impedance or press the Load softkey again to choose High Z To Reset the F unction Generator To reset the instrument to its factory default state press select the Set to Defaults softkey Press YES to confirm the operation For a complete listing of the instrument s power on and reset conditions see Agilent 33220A Factory Default Settings on page 146 35 Chapter 2 Front Panel Menu Operation To Output a Modulated Waveform To Output a Modulated Waveform A modulated waveform consists of a carrier and a modulating waveform In AM amplitude modulation the amplitude of the carrier is varied by the amplitude of the modulating waveform For this example you will output an AM waveform with 80 modulation depth The carrier will be a5 kHz sine wave and the modulating waveform will be a 200 Hz sine wave Select the function frequency and amplitude o
332. ve function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms From the renoteinterface a Settings conflict error will be generated and the amplitude will be adjusted as described e Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the built in Sinc waveform does not use the full range of values between 1 and therefore its maximum amplitude is limited to 6 087 Vpp into 50 ohms e While changing amplitude you may notice a momentary disruption in the output waveform at certain voltages due to switching of the output attenuators The amplitude is controlled however so the output voltage will never exceed the current setting while switching ranges To prevent this disruption in the output you can disable the voltage autoranging feature using the VOLT RANG AUTO command see page 179 for more information e You can also set the amplitude with an associated offset voltage by specifying a high level and low level For example if you set the high level to 2 volts and the low level to 3 volts the resulting amplitude is 5 Vpp with an associated offset voltage of 500 mV Seethe VOLT HIGH and VOLT LOW commands on page 178 for more information e Tooutput a dc voltage leve select the
333. veform with 100 symmetry oO e Select TRI for a ramp waveform with 50 symmetry es e Select NRAM negative ramp for a ramp waveform he with 0 symmetry e If you select an arbitrary waveform as the modulating waveshape USER the waveform is automatically limited to 4K points Extra waveform points are removed using decimation 204 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands PWM INTernal FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum PWM INTernal FREQuency MINimum MAXimum Set the frequency of the modulating waveform Used only when the Internal modulation source is selected PWM SOUR INT command Select from 2 mHz to 20 KHz The default is 10 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 20 kHz The FREQ query returns the internal modulating frequency in hertz PWM DEViation lt deviation in seconds gt MINimum MAXimum PWM DEViation MINimum MAXimum Set the pulse width deviation in seconds This value represents the variation in width in seconds from the pulse width of the carrier pulse waveform The default is 10 us MIN 0 s MAX 1000 s limited by the period minimum pulse width and edge time The DEV query returns the pulse width deviation in seconds e The pulse width deviation cannot exceed the current pulse width e The pulse width deviation is also limited by the minimum pulse width Wmin Width Deviation lt Pulse Width Wmin and Width Deviation lt Period Pulse
334. waveforms in non volatile memory The five built in waveforms in non volatile memory are not deleted e The colon before the ALL parameter is required DATA DELete ALL If you insert a space instead of a colon the function generator will attempt to delete an arbitrary waveform with the name ALL If no such waveform is stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated e UsetheDATA DEL lt arb name gt command to delete stored waveforms one at a time e You cannot delete the arbitrary waveform that is currently being output If you attempt to delete this waveform a Not able to delete the currently selected active arb waveform error is generated e You cannot delete any of the five built in arbitrary waveforms If you attempt to delete one of these waveforms a Not able to delete a built in arb waveform error is generated 236 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Arbitrary Waveform Commands DATA ATTRibute AVERage lt arbname gt Query the arithmetic average of all data points for the specified arbitrary waveform 1 lt average lt 1 The default arb nameis the arbitrary waveform currently active selected with FUNC USER command e If you query a waveform that is not currently stored in memory a Specified arb waveform does not exist error is generated DATA ATTRibute CFACtor lt arbname gt Query the crest factor of all data points for the specified arbit
335. when power is cycled the instrument state previously stored will be overwritten 239 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference State Storage Commands MEMory STATe NAME 0 1 2 3 4 lt name MEMory STATe NAME 0 1 2 3 4 Assign a custom name to the specified storage location You can name a location from the front panel or over the remote interface but you can only recall a state by name from the front panel the RCL command requires a numeric parameter The NAME query returns a quoted string containing the name currently assigned to the specified storage location If you have not assigned a user defined name to the specified location the default name is returned AUTO RECALL STATE_1 STATE_2 STATE_3 or STATE _4 e Thenamecan contain up to 12 characters The first character must be a letter A Z but the remaining characters can be letters numbers 0 9 or the underscore character _ Blank spaces are not allowed An error is generated if you specify a name with more than 12 characters An example is shown below MEM STATE NAME 1 TEST WFORM 1 e From the front panel you cannot assign a custom name to storage location 0 e If you do not specify a name note that the name parameter is optional the default name is assigned to that state This provides a way to clear a name however the stored state is not deleted e The function generator will not prevent you from assig
336. will be generated For example if you set the amplitude to 10 Vpp and then change the output termination from 50 ohms to high impedance the amplitude displayed on the function generator s front panel will doubleto 20 Vpp If you change from high impedance to 50 ohms the displayed amplitude will drop in half For moreinformation see Output Termination on page 63 Limits Dueto Units Selection In some cases the amplitude limits are determined by the output units selected This may occur when the units are Vrms or dBm due to the differences in crest factor for the various output functions For example if you output a 5 Vrms square wave into 50 ohms and then change to the sine wave function the function generator will automatically adjust the output amplitude to 3 536 Vrms the upper limit for sine waves in Vrms 58 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Output Configuration You can set the output amplitude in Vpp Vrms or dBm F or more information see Output Units on page 62 You cannot specify the output amplitude in dBm if the output termination is currently set to high impedance The units are automatically converted to Vpp For moreinformation see Output Units on page 62 Arbitrary Waveform Limitations For arbitrary waveforms the maximum amplitude will be limited if the waveform data points do not span the full range of the output DAC Digital to Analog Converter For example the bu
337. will not seethe new IP address until you press the Refresh button Try the Agilent 33220A Web Interface The Agilent 33220A provides a web interface resident in the instrument You can use this interface over the LAN to view and modify the instrument s I O configuration Also a remote front panel interface is provided which allows you to control the instrument over the network To access and use the web interface 1 Establish LAN interface connectivity from your PC to the 33220A 2 Open your PC s web browser 3 To launch the web interface enter the IP address of the instrument or its fully qualified host name in the browser address field 4 Follow the directions in the web interface s online help For further information see the Agilent Technologies USB LAN GPIB Connectivity Guide which you can download from the Agilent web site at the following URL www agilent com find connectivity 140 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Calibration Overview Calibration Overview This section gives a brief introduction to the calibration features of the function generator F or a more detailed discussion of the calibration procedures see chapter 4 in the Agilent 33220A Service Guide Calibration Security This feature allows you to enter a security code to prevent accidental or unauthorized calibrations of the function generator When you first receive your function generator it is secured Before you can per
338. with a single command 90 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Shift Keying FSK Modulation FSK Hop Frequency The maximum alternate or hop frequency depends on the function selected as shown below The default is 100 Hz for all functions Function Minimum Frequency Maximum Frequency Sine 1 wHz 20 MHz Square 1 wHz 20 MHz Ramp 1 wHz 200 kHz Arbs 1 wHz 6 MHz The internal modulating waveform is a square wave with a 50 duty cycle When the External source is selected the output frequency is determined by the signal level on the rear panel Trig In connector When a logic low level is present the carrier frequency is output When a logic high level is present the hop frequency is output Front Pand Operation To set the hop frequency press the Hop Freq softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired frequency Remote nterface Operation FSKey FREQuency lt frequency gt MINimum MAXimum FSK Rate The FSK rateis the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier frequency and the hop frequency when you select the internal FSK source FSK rate internal source 2 mHz to 100 kHz Thedefault is 10 Hz The FSK rate is ignored when the external FSK source is selected Front Pand Operation To set the FSK rate press the FSK Rate softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired rate Remote nterface Operatio
339. xample if you have set the modulation depth to 100 then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude e Front Pand Operation After enabling AM press the AM Depth softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the depth e Remote nterface Operation AM DEPTh lt depth in percents MINimum MAXimum 77 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Amplitude Modulation AM Modulating Source The function generator will accept an internal or external modulation source for AM e Modulating source Internal or External The default is Internal e If you select the External source the carrier waveform is modulated with an external waveform The modulation depth is controlled by the 45V signal level present on the rear panel Modulation In connector For example if you have set the modulation depth to 100 then when the modulating signal is at 5 volts the output will be at the maximum amplitude When the modulating signal is at 5 volts then the output will be at the minimum amplitude Modulation In 5 V OV e Front Pand Operation After enabling AM press the Source softkey e Remotelnterface Operation AM SOURce INTernal EXTernal 78 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Modulation FM Frequency Modulation FM A modulated waveform consists of a carr
340. y Waveform Commands 227 State Storage Commands 238 System Related Commands 242 Interface Configuration Commands 247 Phase Lock Commands Option 001 Only 248 TheSCPI Status System 250 Status Reporting Commands 260 Calibration Commands 264 An Introduction to the SCPI Language 266 Using Device Clear 271 10 Contents Chapter 5 Error Messages 273 Command Errors 275 Execution Errors 278 Device Dependent Errors 293 Query Errors 294 Instrument Errors 295 Self Test Errors 296 Calibration Errors 298 Arbitrary Waveform Errors 299 Chapter 6 Application Programs 301 Introduction 302 Program Listings 304 Chapter 7 Tutorial 311 Direct Digital Synthesis 313 Creating Arbitrary Waveforms 316 Square Waveform Generation 318 Pulse Waveform Generation 319 Signal Imperfections 320 Output Amplitude Control 322 Ground Loops 323 Attributes of AC Signals 325 Modulation 327 Frequency Sweep 332 Burst 333 11 U9 U05 c x e O Chapter 8 Specifications 335 Waveforms 336 Waveform Characteristics 336 Common Characteristics 337 Modulation 337 Sweep 338 Burst 338 Trigger Characteristics 338 Programming Times 338 General 339 Product Dimensions 340 Index 341 12 Quick Start Quick Start One of the first things you will want to do with your function generator is to become acquainted with the front panel We have written the exercises in this chapter to prep
341. y again to toggle between the linear or log mode e Remotelnterface Operation SWEep SPACing LINear LOGarithmic Sweep Time The sweep time specifies the number of seconds required to sweep from the start frequency to the stop frequency The number of discrete frequency points in the sweep is automatically calculated by the function generator and is based on the sweep time you select e Sweep time 1 ms to 500 seconds The default is 1 second e Front Paned Operation After enabling sweeps press the Sweep Time softkey Then use the knob or numeric keypad to enter the desired sweep time e Remotelnterface Operation SWEep TIME lt seconds gt MINimum MAXimum 102 Chapter 3 Features and Functions Frequency Sweep Marker Frequency If desired you can set the frequency at which the signal on the front panel Sync connector goes to a logic low during the sweep The Sync signal always goes from low to high at the beginning of the sweep Marker frequency 1 wHz to 20 MHz limited to 200 kHz for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 500 Hz When the sweep mode is enabled the marker frequency must be between the specified start frequency and stop frequency If you attempt to set the marker frequency to a frequency not in this range the function generator will automatically set the marker frequency equal tothe start frequency or stop frequency whichever is closer The Sync enable setting is overrid
342. y the minimum or maximum frequency allowed with the present function as follows FREQ MIN FREQ MAX SCPI Command Terminators A command string sent to the function generator must terminate with a lt new line gt character The EEE 488 EOI End Or dentify message is interpreted as a new line gt character and can be used to terminate a command string in place of a new line gt character A lt carriagere turn gt followed by a lt new line gt is also accepted Command string termination will always reset the current SCPI command path to the root level l E E E 488 2 Common Commands ThelEEE 488 2 standard defines a set of common commands that perform functions such as reset self test and status operations Common commands always begin with an asterisk are three characters in length and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a blank space Use a semicolon to separate multiple commands as shown below RST CLS ESE 32 OPC 269 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference An Introduction to the SCPI Language SCPI Parameter Types The SCPI language defines several different data formats to be used in program messages and response messages Numeric Parameters Commands that require numeric parameters will accept all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation Special values
343. z for ramps and 6 MHz for arbitrary waveforms The default is 100 Hz MIN 1 uHz MAX 20 MHz The FREQ query returns the hop frequency in hertz FSKey INTernal RATE lt ratein HZ gt MINimum MAXimum FSKey INTernal RATE MINimum MAXimum Set the rate at which the output frequency shifts between the carrier and hop frequency Select from 2 mHz to 100 kHz The default is 10 Hz MIN 2 mHz MAX 100 kHz The RATE query returns the FSK rate in hertz e TheFSK rateis only used when the Internal source is selected FSK SOUR INT command and is ignored when the external source is selected FSK SOUR EXT command e The modulating waveform is a square wave with a 50 duty cycle FSKey STATe OFF ON FSKey STATe Disable or enable FSK modulation To avoid multiple waveform changes you can enable FSK after you have set up the other modulation parameters The default is OFF The STAT query returns 0 OFF or 1 ON e The function generator will allow only one modulation mode to be enabled at a time For example you cannot enable FSK and AM at the same time When you enable FSK the previous modulation mode is turned off e The function generator will not allow FSK to be enabled at the same time that sweep or burst is enabled When you enable F SK the sweep or burst mode is turned off 202 Chapter 4 Remote Interface Reference Pulse Width Modulation PWM Commands Pulse Width Modulation PW

Agilent 33220A 20 MHz Function / Arbitrary Waveform Generator

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents